Mental Health Bill [HL]

A Bill to make provision to amend the Mental Health Act 1983 in relation to mentally disordered persons; and for connected purposes.


This is not the latest version of the Bill

Available Versions

25 Jun 2025
Commons: Report
Bill 272 2024-25 (as amended in Public Bill Committee)
No digital version of this Bill was published by Parliament
24 Apr 2025
Commons: Committee
Bill 225 2024-25 (as brought from the House of Lords)
(87 amendments)
2 Apr 2025
Lords: Third
HL Bill 93 (as amended on Report)
(1 amendments)
24 Feb 2025
Lords: Report
HL Bill 73 (as amended in Committee)
(85 amendments)
6 Nov 2024
Lords: Committee
HL Bill 47 (as introduced)
No digital version of this Bill was published by Parliament

Amendment Filters

Your selections will update the bill and amendment list to show only amendments matching your chosen criteria.

Amendment Type

Amendment Status




Display Options

Proposed New Clauses

Page 1

Code of practice

 
"Principles to inform decisions"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

28. Under section 118 the Secretary of State in relation to England and Welsh ministers in relation to Wales are required to prepare a Code of Practice to guide decision-makers listed in section 118(1), which must be consulted on and be presented to Parliament or the Senedd for scrutiny. Section 118 sets out that the Code must include a statement of the principles which the Secretary of State, in relation to England, thinks should inform particular decisions under the Act, and that in preparing the statement of principles the Secretary of State shall, in particular, ensure that a specific list of matters is addressed. The requirement in relation to the statement of principles does not currently apply to Wales.

29. Clause 1 amends section 118 so that the statement of principles must, in particular, include the four principles developed by the Independent Review, in partnership with people with lived experience. These principles are choice and autonomy, least restriction, therapeutic benefit, and the person as an individual. Clause 1 also sets out a number of matters, which must be addressed in the Code, in relation to each of the four principles.

30. The effect of this change is that Secretary of State in relation to England, and Welsh ministers, in relation to Wales, will be required to include the four principles in the statement of principles in the Code of Practice, and that these principles should inform relevant decisions under the Act. Those who under section 118 2D must have regard to the Code, must also have regard for the statement of principles in the Code and therefore will be required to have regard for the four principles when making decisions under the Act.

1
Principles to inform decisions
 
 
In section 118 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (duty to prepare code of practice,
 
 
including principles which the person making it thinks should inform decisions
 
 
under the Act) for subsection (2B) substitute—
5
 
“(2B)
The statement of principles must, in particular, include the principles,
 
 
and address the matters, specified in the table.
 
 
Principle
 
 
Matters to be addressed
 
 
Choice and autonomy
 
 
involvement of patients in decision-making,
 
 
and consideration of the views of carers
10
 
and other interested parties
 
 
Least restriction
 
 
minimising restrictions on liberty so far as
 
 
consistent with patient wellbeing and
 
 
safety and public safety
 
 
Therapeutic benefit
15
 
effectiveness and appropriateness of
15
 
treatment
 
 
The person as an
 
 
treating patients with dignity and respect
 
 
individual
 
 
and considering their attributes and past
 
 
experiences”
 
"Application of principles to Wales"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

31. Clause 2 amends section 118 of the Act to extend to Wales the same requirement to include a statement of principles in the Code, and include in the Code the same principles and ensure the Code addresses the same specific matters in relation to each principle, as is required in relation to the Code in England.

32. The effect of this change is that Welsh Ministers will be required to include the four principles (choice and autonomy, least restriction, therapeutic benefit, and the person as an individual), and ensure the Code addresses the same specified matters in relation to each of the four principles, when preparing the Mental Health Act Code of Practice for Wales. Those who under section 118 2D must have regard to the code, must also have regard to the statement of principles in the code and therefore will be required to have regard for the four principles when making decisions under the Act.

33. The Welsh code is already required to undergo Welsh Parliamentary scrutiny, but the clause also updates the position in relation to the Parliamentary scrutiny procedure in Wales, in relation to the Welsh Code.

2
Application of principles to Wales
20
 
(1)
Section 118 of the Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In subsection (1), for “Secretary of State” substitute “appropriate national
 
 
authority”.
 
 
(3)
In subsection (2)—
 

Page 2

 
(a)
for “The code” substitute “A code prepared under this section”;
 
 
(b)
for “Secretary of State” substitute “appropriate national authority”.
 
 
(4)
In subsection (2A)—
 
 
(a)
for “The code” substitute “A code prepared under this section”;
 
 
(b)
for “Secretary of State” substitute “appropriate national authority”.
5
 
(5)
In subsection (2C), for “Secretary of State” substitute “appropriate national
 
 
authority”.
 
 
(6)
For subsection (2D) substitute—
 
 
“(2D)
Any person for whose guidance a code of practice under this section
 
 
is prepared or revised must have regard to the code.”
10
 
(7)
For subsection (3) substitute—
 
 
“(3)
Before preparing a code under this section or making any alteration
 
 
in it the appropriate national authority must consult such bodies as
 
 
appear to the appropriate national authority to be concerned.”
 
 
(8)
In subsection (4), for “the code and of any alteration in the code” substitute
15
 
“any code prepared by the Secretary of State under this section and any
 
 
alteration in such a code”.
 
 
(9)
After subsection (5) insert—
 
 
“(5A)
The Welsh Ministers must lay copies of any code prepared by them
 
 
under this section or any alteration in such a code before Senedd
20
 
Cymru; and if the Senedd passes a resolution requiring the code or
 
 
any alteration in it to be withdrawn, the Welsh Ministers must
 
 
withdraw the code or alteration, and where they withdraw the code,
 
 
must prepare a code in substitution for the one which is withdrawn.
 
 
(5B)
No resolution may be passed by Senedd Cymru under subsection (5A)
25
 
in respect of a code or revised code after the expiration of the period
 
 
of 40 days beginning with the day on which a copy of the code was
 
 
laid before the Assembly.
 
 
(5C)
For the purposes of subsection (5B) no account is to be taken of any
 
 
time during which the Senedd Cymru is dissolved or is in recess for
30
 
more than four days.”
 
 
(10)
In subsection (6) for “Secretary of State” substitute “appropriate national
 
 
authority”.
 
 
(11)
After subsection (7) insert—
 
 
“(8)
In this section “the appropriate national authority”—
35
 
(a)
in relation to England, means the Secretary of State;
 
 
(b)
in relation to Wales, means the Welsh Ministers.”
 

Page 3

Autism and learning disability

 
"Application of the"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

34. Currently, people with a learning disability and autistic people can be detained for both assessment and treatment under section 2 of the Act. People with a learning disability may also be detained for treatment under section 3 when their learning disability is associated with abnormally aggressive and seriously irresponsible conduct. This qualification does not apply to autistic people. We have seen that some people with a learning disability and autistic people can be subject to lengthy detentions, which may not provide a therapeutic benefit. Clause 3 and Schedule 1 include new definitions in the Act and make amendments using those definitions throughout the Act. These amendments have the effect of removing, for the purposes of Part 2 of the Act, people with a learning disability and autistic people from the scope of the conditions for which a person can be detained for compulsory treatment under section 3. People with a learning disability and autistic people will only be able to be detained for treatment under Part 2 of the Act if they satisfy the conditions set out in section 3 of the Act, which includes that they have a co-occurring mental disorder which is not learning disability or autism.

35. This change in how the Act applies to patients with a learning disability and autistic people under Part 2 of the Act seeks to ensure that people are only admitted when they have a mental disorder that warrants hospital treatment, which has a reasonable prospect of providing a therapeutic benefit for their mental disorder. The proposed changes also mean that it will no longer be possible to place a person with a learning disability or an autistic person on a CTO unless they have a co-occurring mental health condition that meets the detention criteria. This is supported by the guiding principle of least restriction.

36. The changes to the way the Act applies to people with a learning disability and autistic people detained for assessment or treatment will not apply under Part 3 of the Act (i.e. individuals accused of, or serving a sentence for committing a crime). For this cohort of people, the only alternative to detention in hospital is detention in prison. Consultation with experts following the publication of the 2021 White Paper found that, on balance, detention in hospital is considered more appropriate in the majority of cases than detention in prison, to ensure that people in this cohort are able to access the specialist support they may need. The Ministry of Justice is satisfied that the current application of the detention criteria to people with a learning disability and autistic people detained under Part 3 of the Act enables professionals to make the right decisions for people in this cohort, including where this requires diversion from criminal justice settings into a hospital setting.

37. Clause 3 amends section 1 of the Act. Subsection (2) modifies the meaning of mental disorder under the Act by including new definitions of \

34. Currently, people with a learning disability and autistic people can be detained for both assessment and treatment under section 2 of the Act. People with a learning disability may also be detained for treatment under section 3 when their learning disability is associated with abnormally aggressive and seriously irresponsible conduct. This qualification does not apply to autistic people. We have seen that some people with a learning disability and autistic people can be subject to lengthy detentions, which may not provide a therapeutic benefit. Clause 3 and Schedule 1 include new definitions in the Act and make amendments using those definitions throughout the Act. These amendments have the effect of removing, for the purposes of Part 2 of the Act, people with a learning disability and autistic people from the scope of the conditions for which a person can be detained for compulsory treatment under section 3. People with a learning disability and autistic people will only be able to be detained for treatment under Part 2 of the Act if they satisfy the conditions set out in section 3 of the Act, which includes that they have a co-occurring mental disorder which is not learning disability or autism.

35. This change in how the Act applies to patients with a learning disability and autistic people under Part 2 of the Act seeks to ensure that people are only admitted when they have a mental disorder that warrants hospital treatment, which has a reasonable prospect of providing a therapeutic benefit for their mental disorder. The proposed changes also mean that it will no longer be possible to place a person with a learning disability or an autistic person on a CTO unless they have a co-occurring mental health condition that meets the detention criteria. This is supported by the guiding principle of least restriction.

36. The changes to the way the Act applies to people with a learning disability and autistic people detained for assessment or treatment will not apply under Part 3 of the Act (i.e. individuals accused of, or serving a sentence for committing a crime). For this cohort of people, the only alternative to detention in hospital is detention in prison. Consultation with experts following the publication of the 2021 White Paper found that, on balance, detention in hospital is considered more appropriate in the majority of cases than detention in prison, to ensure that people in this cohort are able to access the specialist support they may need. The Ministry of Justice is satisfied that the current application of the detention criteria to people with a learning disability and autistic people detained under Part 3 of the Act enables professionals to make the right decisions for people in this cohort, including where this requires diversion from criminal justice settings into a hospital setting.

37. Clause 3 amends section 1 of the Act. Subsection (2) modifies the meaning of mental disorder under the Act by including new definitions of “autism”, “learning disability” and “psychiatric disorder". Autism and psychiatric disorder were not previously defined in the Act. "Psychiatric disorder" is a new term which covers mental disorder other than learning disability or autism. The definition of “learning disability" is also amended to remove reference to "social functioning", drawing a greater distinction between learning disability and the new definition "autism". Schedule 1 then makes amendments across the Act, to apply these new definitions. The effect of this is that people with a learning disability and autistic people will not be able to be detained for compulsory treatment under section 3 of the Act unless they have a psychiatric disorder, which by the definition, excludes learning disability and autism. They will also no longer be able to be made subject to community treatment orders under section 17A.

38. Subsection (2)(b) inserts a new subsection (2A) in section 1 of the Act which sets out that, for the purposes of the Act, a person's learning disability has “serious behavioural consequences” if it is associated with abnormally aggressive or seriously irresponsible conduct by the person. This currently applies, for the purposes of Part 2, in relation to people with a learning disability in respect of section 3 detention for treatment, section 7 guardianship, section 17A community treatment order, renewals of authority under those provisions and Tribunal discharge criteria from those provisions. Under the changes made by Schedule 1, it will only apply in relation to guardianship. The Bill makes no change to the way the "serious behavioural consequences” threshold applies in respect of people with learning disability under Part 3 of the Act because there is no change to the way the Act applies to them for the purposes of the Part 3 detention criteria.

39. Subsection (2)(c) omits the previous definition of learning disability under subsection (4) of the Act.

40. Subsection (3) inserts definitions of “autism”, “learning disability”, “psychiatric disorder" and "serious behavioural consequences" into section 145 of the Act.

41. Subsection (4) explains the effect of the Schedule 1 amendments to the Act. Schedule 1 amends section 3 of the Act to prevent individuals from being detained on the basis of their learning disability or autism. It also makes related changes in relation to the application of the Act to autism and learning disability.

42. These changes do not apply for Part 3 patients, who will continue to be liable to be detained pursuant to the previous threshold. Paragraph 8 of Schedule 1 sets out the new definition of "relevant disorder" which applies for Part 3 patients, including autism and learning disability which has serious behavioural consequences. Paragraphs 11(2) to (5) and (10) provide that CTOs are available for these patients, where relevant. Paragraphs 11(6) to (9) provide for renewals of detention for unrestricted hospital order patients. Paragraphs 12 to 15 make consequential changes throughout the treatment provisions of the Act for Part 3 patients. Paragraph 17 clarifies that this definition should apply to discharge assessments by the Tribunal for patients subject to Part 3 detention, and paragraph 18 and 19 provide for the same application for restricted patients. Paragraphs 20 to 25 make transitory modifications to ensure the new definitions are given effect in the event these provisions are commenced before section 7, which provides for the new discharge criteria.

3
Application of the
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 1 (application of Act: “mental disorder”)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (2) , at the appropriate places insert—
5
 
““autism” means a lifelong developmental disorder of the mind
 
 
that affects how people perceive, communicate and interact
 
 
with others;”;
 
 
““learning disability” means a state of arrested or incomplete
 
 
development of the mind which includes significant impairment
10
 
of intelligence;”;
 
 
““psychiatric disorder” means mental disorder other than autism
 
 
or learning disability;”;
 
 
(b)
for subsections (2A) and (2B) substitute—
 
 
“(2A)
For the purposes of this Act, a person’s learning disability has
15
 
“serious behavioural consequences” if it is associated with
 
 
abnormally aggressive or seriously irresponsible conduct by
 
 
the person.”;
 
 
(c)
omit subsection (4) .
 
 
(3)
In section 145 (interpretation of the Mental Health Act 1983), in subsection
20
 
(1), at the appropriate places insert—
 
 
“autism” has the meaning given in section 1;”;
 
 
“learning disability” has the meaning given in section 1;”;
 
 
“psychiatric disorder” has the meaning given in section 1;”;
 
 
““serious behavioural consequences” , in relation to a person’s learning
25
 
disability, is to be read in accordance with section 1 (2A) ;”.
 
 
(4)
Schedule 1 amends the Mental Health Act 1983 to—
 
 
(a)
prevent people from being detained under section 3 of that Act
 
 
(admission for treatment) on the basis of autism or learning disability,
 
 
and
30
 
(b)
make related changes in relation to the application of that Act to autism
 
 
and learning disability.
 

Page 4

"People with autism or learning disability"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

43. Clause 4 inserts a new Part 8A into the Act which contains clauses specific to people with a learning disability and autistic people.

44. People with a learning disability and autistic people can be subject to unnecessarily lengthy detentions, which may not meet their needs and provide little or no therapeutic benefit. NHS England issued guidance regarding the holding of reviews – known as Care (Education) and Treatment Reviews – to focus on reducing unnecessarily long stays in hospital and reducing health inequalities.

45. Care (Education) and Treatment Reviews currently focus on whether a patient with a learning disability or an autistic patient is safe and receiving the right care and treatment. They also assess if individuals have any specific needs for social care, special educational provision, or medical treatment. The Care (Education) and Treatment Review panel makes recommendations to overcome barriers related to these key lines of enquiry.

46. Care (Education) and Treatment Reviews are part of current NHS England policy; however, it has been found that their recommendations are not always being acted upon and there is often no process of follow-up, contributing to the perpetuated detention of people with a learning disability and autistic people, often without therapeutic benefit.

47. New section 125A provides for the making of arrangements for ensuring care, education and treatment review meetings take place for children (i.e. those under 18) and adults with an education, health and care plan under the Children and Families Act 2014 detained under certain sections of the Act. By requiring, education and treatment review meetings to be held, the Bill seeks to ensure that the care, treatment and differing support needs of people with a learning disability and autistic people are identified and recommendations as to how to meet these are made so that barriers to progress are challenged and overcome. This measure supports the principle of the person as an individual.

48. Subsection (1) places a duty on the responsible commissioner to make arrangements for ensuring care, education and treatment review meetings in respect of children and adults with an education, health and care plan detained under the Act (subject to the exceptions set out in this clause) take place. This duty applies to patients who the responsible commissioner considers to be autistic or have a learning disability and who give their consent or, where they lack capacity or competence to consent, the responsible commissioner considers that's in their best interests. This includes certain patients detained under Part 3 of the Act. The Secretary of State is to issue guidance to help support the responsible commissioner in exercising their functions, including guidance on factors to consider when determining whether a care (education) and treatment review may be in a patient's best interests.

49. Subsection (2) explains the purpose of a 'care, education and treatment review meeting'. This makes clear a meeting is to consider whether a patient has certain needs and is also to make certain recommendations. The needs and recommendations set out in this clause are designed to ensure that a holistic view is taken of that person's needs and that the most appropriate care and treatment can be provided.

50. Subsections (3) and (4) give further detail on the arrangements referred to under subsection (1). Subsection (3) sets out that the responsible commissioner must make arrangements for a report to be produced following a care, education and treatment review meeting, setting out the needs identified, and recommendations made, and distributed within 14 days to certain bodies (listed in 125A(3)(b)). The bodies identified in 125A(3)(b) play a vital role in the individual's care and treatment and this provision will mean they will receive important information to assist them in this function. The commissioner may also make arrangements requiring or authorising a copy of the report to be sent to other people in addition to those listed in 125A(3)(b). For example, those who have been involved in the review process or who have an interest in the review recommendations, such as an Independent Mental Health Advocate, Nominated Person, or a professional involved in the patient's care and treatment, subject to the patient's consent.

51. Subsection (4) sets out that the arrangements must ensure that care, education and treatment review meetings take place within certain periods. The initial care, education and treatment review meeting must take place within 14 days, starting with the applicable day. Further care, education and treatment review meetings must take place at least once every 12 months (from the date of that first review), during which time the patient continues to be detained. These are maximum timings, meaning that care, education and treatment review meetings can take place sooner, and at shorter intervals, than set out in the legislation. Secretary of State issued guidance will suggest factors to consider as to whether reviews should happen more frequently in different circumstances.

52. Subsection (5) explains what is meant by 'applicable day', which is the day from when the time for holding a review meeting starts to run. This is determined by when the patient was detained under the Act (not including any emergency period under section 4), or when the responsible commissioner forms the view that the patient is autistic or has a learning disability if that is later.

53. Subsection (6) makes clear that a patient may withdraw consent to the review meeting and to the disclosure of information in accordance with the arrangements under subsection (1). Subsection (7) provides that 'arrangements' under subsection (1) must include provision about how consent may be withdrawn and what is to happen when consent is withdrawn.

54. New section 125B covers the arrangement of care and treatment review meetings for adults, (including adults without an education, health and care plan under the Children and Families Act 2014), detained under the Act (subject to the exceptions set out in this clause). This clause makes similar provisions to that in respect of children and adults with an education, health and care plan set out in 125A, though there are key differences. Subsection (4) sets out that arrangements must ensure that care and treatment review meetings take place within certain periods. The initial care and treatment review meeting must take place within 28 days, starting with the applicable day. As with children, and adults with an education, health and care plan, further care and treatment reviews must take place at least once every 12 months (from the date of the first review), during which the patient continues to be detained. As in 125A(4), these are maximum timings, meaning that in practice, care and treatment review meetings can take place sooner, and at shorter intervals, than set out in the legislation. Again, the provisions also apply to some patients detained under Part 3 of the Act.

55. New section 125C requires that the patient's responsible clinician, the responsible commissioner, integrated care board (ICB) and local authority that receive the report produced following the review must have regard to the recommendations in the report. This provision is designed to ensure that recommendations made as part of the review process are given proper weight when making decisions over the individual's care and treatment. This will help to provide the individual with the most appropriate support based on their needs.

56. As part of NHS England's current Dynamic Support Register and Care (Education) and Treatment Review policy and guidance, local health commissioners are required to work with their local partners, including social care and education, to develop and maintain a register of people with a learning disability and autistic people who are at risk of admission to a mental health hospital. This is known as the Dynamic Support Register. The register supports local systems to identify people at risk of admission, review their needs, and mobilise the right support to prevent the person being admitted to a mental health hospital.

57. New section 125D provides a duty on ICBs to establish and maintain a register of people with a learning disability and autistic people, for whom the ICB is responsible, who are at risk of hospital admission under Part 2.

58. Subsection (1) places a duty on ICBs to establish and maintain a register of people for whom the ICB is responsible and who the ICB considers to be autistic or have a learning disability and who have risk factors for detention under Part 2 of the Act.

59. This clause is designed to help ensure that ICBs can monitor individuals at risk of detention and put in place the necessary preventative measures to help keep people out of hospitals. It also creates a duty for the Secretary of State to set out in regulations the factors which make an individual "at risk" for detention. This will ensure consistency in how ICBs make decisions as to which individuals are eligible for placement on the register.

60. Subsection (1)(c) provides that a person must consent to being included in the register (and to the use of their information under the section) or where they lack capacity or competence to do so, the ICB considers that this is in their best interests.

61. Subsection (2) provides that the local authority in which each person included in the register is ordinarily resident must be specified on the register.

62. Subsections (3)(a) and (b) provide a power for the Secretary of State to make regulations specifying the information that an ICB is to include for each individual's entry in a register and the format and content of registers. Subsections (3)(c) and (d) also provide a power for the Secretary of State to make regulations pertaining to information-gathering by the ICB for the purposes of determining if an individual is eligible for inclusion on the register and onward disclosure of this information. This power is designed to ensure the register is maintained in a consistent manner across ICBs and to enable information to be collected and shared appropriately. Subsection (3)(e) provides that regulations may make provision about the withdrawal of consent by a person to their inclusion in the register.

63. Subsection (4) places a duty on the Secretary of State to, by regulations, specify the description of people for which each ICB is ‘responsible' for the purposes of 125D. This must identify be people in relation to which the board has commissioning functions.

64. Subsection (5) provides that “risk factors for detention under Part 2 of this Act" mean factors which the Secretary of State considers increase the probability of a person being detained under the Part 2 of the Act. An ICB will consider such risk factors when deciding whether an individual is eligible for inclusion on the register.

65. New section 125E provides that ICBs and local authorities must have regard to certain information and the needs of the local 'at risk' population when carrying out certain commissioning duties (as set out in the clause). These clauses will help ensure the right community provisions are in place for people with a learning disability and autistic people to avoid unnecessary admissions to inpatient settings.

66. Subsection (1) provides that when an ICB is exercising its commissioning functions it must have regard to the information included in its register and any other information it obtains under the clause. Further, an ICB must seek to ensure that the needs of people with a learning disability and autistic people can be met without detaining them under Part 2 of the Act. This clause is meant to ensure that an ICB has a particular focus on the needs of people with a learning disability and autistic people who are at risk of detention under Part 2 of the Act when undertaking its commissioning functions.

67. Similarly, subsection (2) places a similar duty on a local authority to have regard to certain information and the above needs when exercising its market function. The intention of this clause is to help ensure the necessary adult social care services are available for people with a learning disability and autistic people who are or may be at risk of admission.

68. Subsection (3) provides that 'market function' has the same meaning as in section 5(1) of the Care Act 2014.

69. New section 125F provides that the Secretary of State must publish guidance about the exercise of functions in relation to care, (education), and treatment reviews, registers and duties relating to the commissioning of services for Part 8A of the Act. Responsible clinicians, responsible commissioners, ICBs, and local authorities must have regard to this guidance when exercising their functions under this part of the Act.

70. New section 125G is to be used when interpreting the meaning of the following terms of Part 8A of the Act: 'commissioning functions', 'local authority', 'NHS commissioning body', 'responsible clinician', 'responsible commissioner', 'social care provision' and 'special educational provision'.

71. Subsection (2) provides that references to a patient who lacks capacity in this Part has the same meaning as in the Mental Capacity Act 2005. Subsections (3) and (4) explain how ordinary residence is determined for the purpose of this Part. a. For the purposes of Part 8A, references to ordinary residence, broadly speaking, reflect the new rules for determining ordinary residence of the purposes of section 117 after-care (see clause 44). When it comes to C(E)TRs, the clauses provide that ordinary residence will need to be identified from the point at which the person was admitted to hospital. For the risk register, ordinary residence will need to be determined from the point at which the person was entered on the register and then kept under review.

72. The clauses ensure that the following 'deeming rules' under social care legislation should be applied to the determination of ordinary residence: a. In relation to those aged under 18, section 105(6) of the Children Act 1989 (as modified), which means that, broadly, any periods should be disregarded when the person was living in certain forms of accommodation, including residential schools, accommodation provided by a local authority and section 117 accommodation. b. In respect of adults, section 29(1)-(3) of the Care Act 2014, which provide that where a person has needs that can only be met through care home, supported living or shared lives accommodation, and are living in that accommodation, they are treated as ordinarily resident in the area they lived immediately before they moved into this accommodation. C. In respect of adults, section 39(5) of the Care Act 2014, which provides that a person being provided with accommodation under section 117 of the Mental Health Act 1983 is treated as ordinarily resident in the area of the local authority on which the duty under section 117 is imposed.

73. Some examples of how the ordinary rules would apply are provided below: a. Where local authority A provides an adult with care home accommodation in another local authority area (local authority B), the person will remain ordinarily resident in the area of local authority A. This means that for the purposes of the C(E)TR and the risk register their ordinary residence will remain in local authority A. b. Where a child is living at home with their family in the area of local authority A and is moved to a secure children's home in local authority B, their ordinary residence will remain with local authority A for the purposes of the CETR and risk register. Ordinary residence would remain with local authority A even if the child was detained in hospital and discharged into accommodation provided under section 117 of the MHA, in the area of local authority C.

4
People with autism or learning disability
 
 
In the Mental Health Act 1983, after Part 8 insert—
 

Part 8A

 
 
People in England with autism or learning disability
 
125A
Children and young people with autism or learning disability: reviews
5
 
(1)
The responsible commissioner must make arrangements for ensuring
 
 
that care, education and treatment review meetings take place in
 
 
relation to a patient if—
 
 
(a)
the patient is liable to be detained under this Act in a hospital
 
 
or registered establishment in England otherwise than—
10
 
(i)
by virtue of an emergency application where the second
 
 
medical recommendation referred to in section 4(4)(a)
 
 
has not been given and received, or
 
 
(ii)
by virtue of section 5(2) or (4), 135 or 136 or directions
 
 
for detention in a place of safety under section 35(4),
15
 
36(3), 37(4), 38(4) or 45A(5),
 
 
(b)
the patient is considered by the responsible commissioner to
 
 
have autism or a learning disability, and
 
 
(c)
the patient—
 
 
(i)
is aged under 18, or
20
 
(ii)
is aged 18 or over and is a person for whom a plan is
 
 
maintained under section 37 of the Children and
 
 
Families Act 2014 (education, health and care plans),
 
 
and
 
 
(d)
either—
25
 
(i)
the patient consents to meetings taking place and to the
 
 
disclosure of information in accordance with the
 
 
arrangements, and to the use of the information in
 
 
accordance with this Act, or
 
 
(ii)
the patient lacks capacity or competence to give that
30
 
consent but the responsible commissioner considers that
 
 
it is nonetheless in the patient’s best interests for the
 
 
meetings to take place, and information to be disclosed
 
 
and used, as mentioned in sub-paragraph (i) .
 
 
(2)
In this section “care, education and treatment review meeting” means
35
 
a meeting, convened by the responsible commissioner, for the purpose
 
 
of reviewing a patient’s case in order to—
 
 
(a)
identify any needs of the patient for—
 
 
(i)
social care provision,
 
 
(ii)
special educational provision, or
40
 
(iii)
medical treatment, and
 
 
(b)
make recommendations about—
 
 
(i)
whether and how any such needs can be met,
 

Page 5

 
(ii)
how the patient’s safety can be ensured while they are
 
 
liable to be detained,
 
 
(iii)
the discharge of the patient from the hospital or
 
 
registered establishment under section 23 (where that
 
 
section applies in relation to the patient), and
5
 
(iv)
how to reduce any risk of the patient being re-admitted
 
 
to a hospital or registered establishment following
 
 
discharge.
 
 
(3)
The arrangements under subsection (1) must include—
 
 
(a)
arrangements for the preparation of a report (whether by the
10
 
responsible commissioner or another person) setting out the
 
 
needs identified, and recommendations made, at each meeting,
 
 
(b)
arrangements for the provision of a copy of the report, within
 
 
the period of 14 days beginning with the day on which a
 
 
meeting takes place, to each of the following persons (other
15
 
than any who prepared the report)—
 
 
(i)
the responsible commissioner,
 
 
(ii)
the patient’s responsible clinician,
 
 
(iii)
the integrated care board that will have the duty under
 
 
section 117 to provide or arrange for the provision of
20
 
after-care services for the patient, and
 
 
(iv)
the local authority in whose area the patient is
 
 
ordinarily resident.
 
 
(The arrangements may also include provision authorising or requiring
 
 
a copy of the report to be given to other persons.)
25
 
(4)
The arrangements under subsection (1) must include arrangements
 
 
for ensuring that—
 
 
(a)
the first meeting in relation to the patient takes place within
 
 
the period of 14 days beginning with the applicable day, and
 
 
(b)
a further meeting takes place at least once in each successive
30
 
period of 12 months for which the patient remains liable to be
 
 
detained under this Act, beginning with the day on which the
 
 
first meeting takes place.
 
 
(5)
In subsection (4) “the applicable day” means—
 
 
(a)
in relation to a patient who is liable to be detained by virtue
35
 
of an emergency application—
 
 
(i)
if, when the second medical recommendation referred
 
 
to in section 4(4)(a) is received, the patient is considered
 
 
by the relevant commissioner to have autism or a
 
 
learning disability, the day on which that
40
 
recommendation is received;
 
 
(ii)
otherwise, the day on which the responsible
 
 
commissioner forms the view that the patient has autism
 
 
or a learning disability;
 
 
(b)
in relation to any other patient—
45

Page 6

 
(i)
if, when the patient becomes liable to be detained as
 
 
mentioned in subsection (1) (a) , the patient is considered
 
 
by the relevant commissioner to have autism or a
 
 
learning disability, the day on which the patient
 
 
becomes so liable;
5
 
(ii)
otherwise, the day on which the responsible
 
 
commissioner forms the view that the patient has autism
 
 
or a learning disability.
 
 
(6)
A patient may withdraw consent to the taking place of meetings and
 
 
to the disclosure of information in accordance with arrangements
10
 
under subsection (1) .
 
 
(7)
The arrangements under subsection (1) must include provision about—
 
 
(a)
how consent to the taking place of meetings or the disclosure
 
 
of information may be withdrawn;
 
 
(b)
what is to happen when consent is withdrawn (which may
15
 
include provision about who is to be informed).
 
125B
Other people with autism or learning disability: reviews
 
 
(1)
The responsible commissioner must make arrangements for ensuring
 
 
that care and treatment review meetings take place in relation to a
 
 
patient if—
20
 
(a)
the patient is liable to be detained under this Act in a hospital
 
 
or registered establishment in England otherwise than—
 
 
(i)
by virtue of an emergency application where the second
 
 
medical recommendation referred to in section 4(4)(a)
 
 
has not been given and received, or
25
 
(ii)
by virtue of section 5(2) or (4), 135 or 136 or directions
 
 
for detention in a place of safety under section 35(4),
 
 
36(3), 37(4), 38(4) or 45A(5),
 
 
(b)
the patient is considered by the responsible commissioner to
 
 
have autism or a learning disability,
30
 
(c)
the patient is aged 18 or over and is not a person for whom a
 
 
plan is maintained under section 37 of the Children and
 
 
Families Act 2014 (education, health and care plans), and
 
 
(d)
either—
 
 
(i)
the patient consents to meetings taking place and to the
35
 
disclosure of information in accordance with the
 
 
arrangements, and to the use of the information in
 
 
accordance with this Act, or
 
 
(ii)
the patient lacks capacity to give that consent but the
 
 
responsible commissioner considers that it is nonetheless
40
 
in the patient’s best interests for the meetings to take
 
 
place, and information to be disclosed and used, as
 
 
mentioned in sub-paragraph (i) .
 

Page 7

 
(2)
In this section “care and treatment review meeting” means a meeting,
 
 
convened by the responsible commissioner, for the purpose of
 
 
reviewing a patient’s case in order to—
 
 
(a)
identify any needs of the patient for—
 
 
(i)
social care provision, or
5
 
(ii)
medical treatment, and
 
 
(b)
make recommendations about—
 
 
(i)
whether and how any such needs can be met,
 
 
(ii)
how the patient’s safety can be ensured while they are
 
 
liable to be detained,
10
 
(iii)
the discharge of the patient from the hospital or
 
 
registered establishment under section 23 (where that
 
 
section applies in relation to the patient), and
 
 
(iv)
how to reduce any risk of the patient being re-admitted
 
 
to a hospital or registered establishment following
15
 
discharge.
 
 
(3)
The arrangements under subsection (1) must include arrangements
 
 
for—
 
 
(a)
the preparation of a report (whether by the responsible
 
 
commissioner or another person) setting out the needs
20
 
identified, and recommendations made, at each meeting, and
 
 
(b)
the provision of a copy of the report, within the period of 14
 
 
days beginning with the day on which a meeting takes place,
 
 
to each of the following persons (other than any who prepared
 
 
the report)—
25
 
(i)
the responsible commissioner,
 
 
(ii)
the patient’s responsible clinician, and
 
 
(iii)
the integrated care board that will have the duty under
 
 
section 117 to provide or arrange for the provision of
 
 
after-care services for the patient, and
30
 
(iv)
the local authority in whose area the patient is
 
 
ordinarily resident.
 
 
(The arrangements may also include provision authorising or requiring
 
 
a copy of the report to be given to other persons.)
 
 
(4)
The arrangements under subsection (1) must include arrangements
35
 
for ensuring that—
 
 
(a)
the first meeting in relation to the patient takes place within
 
 
the period of 28 days beginning with the applicable day, and
 
 
(b)
a further meeting takes place at least once in each successive
 
 
period of 12 months for which the patient remains liable to be
40
 
detained under this Act, beginning with the day on which the
 
 
first meeting takes place.
 
 
(5)
In subsection (4) “the applicable day” has the meaning given by section
 
 
125A (5) .
 

Page 8

 
(6)
A patient may withdraw consent to the taking place of meetings and
 
 
to the disclosure of information in accordance with arrangements
 
 
under subsection (1) .
 
 
(7)
The arrangements under subsection (1) must include provision about—
 
 
(a)
how consent to the taking place of meetings or the disclosure
5
 
of information may be withdrawn;
 
 
(b)
what is to happen when consent is withdrawn (which may
 
 
include provision about who is to be informed).
 
125C
Reviews: supplementary
 
 
In exercising functions in relation to a patient in respect of whom a
10
 
review meeting has taken place under section 125A or 125B , the
 
 
following must have regard to the recommendations set out in a report
 
 
prepared in accordance with that section—
 
 
(a)
the patient’s responsible clinician;
 
 
(b)
the responsible commissioner;
15
 
(c)
the integrated care board to which the report is provided;
 
 
(d)
the local authority to which the report is provided.
 
125D
Registers of people at risk of detention
 
 
(1)
Each integrated care board must, in accordance with this section,
 
 
establish and maintain a register and include a person in that register
20
 
if—
 
 
(a)
the person is someone for whom the board has responsibility
 
 
for the purposes of this section,
 
 
(b)
the person is someone the integrated care board considers—
 
 
(i)
to have autism or a learning disability, and
25
 
(ii)
to have specified risk factors for detention under Part
 
 
2 of this Act, and
 
 
(c)
either—
 
 
(i)
the person consents to their inclusion in the register
 
 
and the use, in accordance with this section, of
30
 
information about them, or
 
 
(ii)
the person lacks capacity or competence to give that
 
 
consent but the board considers that it nonetheless in
 
 
their best interests to be included in the register and
 
 
for the use, in accordance with this section, of
35
 
information about them.
 
 
(2)
The register must specify the local authority in whose area each person
 
 
included in it is ordinarily resident.
 
 
(3)
The Secretary of State may by regulations make provision about—
 
 
(a)
the establishment and maintenance of a register under
40
 
subsection (1) ;
 

Page 9

 
(b)
the information about a person that is to be included in a
 
 
register;
 
 
(c)
the obtaining by an integrated care board of—
 
 
(i)
information for the purpose of determining whether
 
 
subsection (1) (b) or (c) applies in relation to a person,
5
 
or
 
 
(ii)
information for inclusion in the register;
 
 
(d)
the disclosure by or to any person of information included in
 
 
a register or obtained by virtue of paragraph (c) ;
 
 
(e)
the withdrawal of consent by a person to their inclusion in the
10
 
register.
 
 
(4)
The Secretary of State must by regulations specify the description of
 
 
people for which each integrated care board is “responsible” for the
 
 
purpose of this section, who must be people in relation to which the
 
 
board has commissioning functions.
15
 
(5)
In this section “specified risk factors for detention under Part 2 of this
 
 
Act” means factors which are specified in regulations made by the
 
 
Secretary of State as factors that the Secretary of State considers
 
 
increase the probability of a person being detained under Part 2 of
 
 
this Act.
20
125E
Registers: duties relating to commissioning of services etc
 
 
(1)
An integrated care board must, in exercising its commissioning
 
 
functions—
 
 
(a)
have regard to the information included in its register under
 
 
section 125D and any other information obtained by it by virtue
25
 
of section 125D (3) (c) , and
 
 
(b)
seek to ensure that the needs of people with autism or a
 
 
learning disability can be met without detaining them under
 
 
Part 2 of this Act.
 
 
(2)
A local authority must, in exercising its market function—
30
 
(a)
have regard to any information disclosed to it by virtue of
 
 
section 125D (3) (d) , and
 
 
(b)
seek to ensure that the needs of people with autism or a
 
 
learning disability can be met without detaining them under
 
 
Part 2 of this Act.
35
 
(3)
In this section “market function”, in relation to a local authority, means
 
 
its function under section 5(1) of the Care Act 2014 (promoting
 
 
diversity and quality in provision of services).
 
125F
Guidance
 
 
(1)
The Secretary of State must publish guidance for the following about
40
 
the exercise of their functions under this Part—
 
 
(a)
responsible clinicians;
 

Page 10

 
(b)
responsible commissioners;
 
 
(c)
integrated care boards;
 
 
(d)
local authorities.
 
 
(2)
The persons referred to in subsection (1) (a) to (d) must have regard
 
 
to guidance published under this section.
5
125G
Interpretation of Part 8A
 
 
(1)
In this Part—
 
 
“commissioning functions” , in relation to an NHS commissioning
 
 
body, means functions of the body in arranging for the
 
 
provision of services as part of the health service continued
10
 
under section 1(1) of the National Health Service Act 2006;
 
 
“local authority” means—
 
 
(a)
a county council in England,
 
 
(b)
a district council for an area in England for which there
 
 
is no county council,
15
 
(c)
a London borough council,
 
 
(d)
the Common Council of the City of London, or
 
 
(e)
the Council of the Isles of Scilly;
 
 
“NHS commissioning body” means NHS England or an integrated
 
 
care board;
20
 
“responsible clinician” has the same meaning as it has in Part 2
 
 
(see section 34(1));
 
 
“responsible commissioner” , in relation to a patient liable to be
 
 
detained in a hospital or registered establishment, means the
 
 
NHS commissioning body in pursuance of whose
25
 
commissioning functions arrangements are required to be made
 
 
for the patient's admission to the hospital or registered
 
 
establishment;
 
 
“social care provision” has the same meaning as it has in Part 3
 
 
of the Children and Families Act 2014 (see section 21 of that
30
 
Act);
 
 
“special educational provision” has the same meaning as it has
 
 
in Part 3 of the Children and Families Act 2014 (see section 21
 
 
of that Act).
 
 
(2)
References in this Part to a patient who lacks capacity are to a patient
35
 
who lacks capacity within the meaning of the Mental Capacity Act
 
 
2005.
 
 
(3)
In determining the ordinary residence of a person who is aged under
 
 
18 for the purposes of section 125A (3) (b) (iv) or 125D (2) , section 105(6)
 
 
of the Children Act 1989 applies as if there were inserted after
40
 
paragraph (c)—
 
 
“(d)
while the child is being provided with accommodation
 
 
under section 117 of the Mental Health Act 1983; or
 

Page 11

 
(e)
while the child is being provided with accommodation
 
 
under the National Health Service Act 2006.”
 
 
(4)
A person aged under 18 who—
 
 
(a)
does not have an ordinary residence, and
 
 
(b)
is living in a place listed in section 105(6) of the Children Act
5
 
1989, as modified by subsection (3) of this section,
 
 
is to be treated for the purposes of section 125A (3) (b) (iv) or 125D (2)
 
 
as ordinarily resident in the area in which they were present
 
 
immediately before living in such a place.
 
 
(5)
In determining the ordinary residence of a person who is aged 18 or
10
 
over for the purposes of section 125A (3) (b) (iv) , 125B (3) (b) (iv) or
 
 
125D (2) , section 39(1) to (6) of, and paragraphs 1(1), 2(1) and (2) and
 
 
8 of Schedule 1 to, the Care Act 2014 apply.
 

Grounds for detention and community treatment orders

 
"Grounds for detention"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

74. Clause 5 amends the criteria for detention under section 2, 3 and 5 of the Act, and the criteria for renewal of detention under section 20 and amends those who can detain under these sections of the Act to constables and authorised persons. This latter change is a change from the current position, whereby, under section 11, applications for compulsory admission of a patient must be made either by the patients' nominated person or by an approved mental health professional. It makes provision as to the level of risk that a patient must pose in order to be detained. This will change the detention criteria to ensure that people can only be detained under these sections if they pose a risk of serious harm either to themselves or to others. This change supports the principle of least restriction, to minimise restrictions on liberty so far as is consistent with ensuring patient wellbeing and safety, and public safety.

75. Apart from aligning the grounds for discharge with the grounds for detention, these changes do not otherwise affect patients who will be detained under Part 3 of the Act, as orders and directions under this Part already have distinct considerations in relation to risks posed by those in the criminal justice system.

76. Clause 5 subsection (2) amends section 2 subsection (2) (admission for assessment) of the Act by introducing risk criteria. The new provisions set out two new tests that must be met to meet the risk criteria for detention: firstly that "serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of the patient or of another person" and secondly that the decision maker must consider "the nature, degree and likelihood of the harm". The timeframe in which harm may occur may also be a relevant consideration when considering the detention criteria and further guidance on this will be provided in the Code of Practice.

77. The purpose of these changes is to provide greater clarity as to the level of risk of harm that a person must present in order to be detained. Firstly, the "serious harm ” test sets out the severity of the harm a patient must pose in order to fulfil the criteria for detention under section 2. The Bill does not define serious harm, further guidance will be provided in the Code of Practice. Secondly, the "nature, degree and likelihood ” test introduces a new requirement that the clinician must consider the likelihood that this harm will occur, when deciding to admit the individual under section 2.

78. Subsection (3) (a) amends section 3 (admission for treatment) of the Act. It inserts new wording on risk in alignment with the changes to section 2 described above. Section 3(2)(c) of the Act is amended so that the previous wording, which sets out that an application for admission for treatment may be made in respect of a patient on the grounds that “it is necessary for the health or safety of the patient or for the protection of other persons that he should receive such treatment and it cannot be provided unless he is detained under this section" in now sets out at subsection (2) (d), "the necessary treatment cannot be provided unless the patient is detained under this Act”. The purpose of this change is to clarify that, in cases where a patient satisfies the criteria for detention under section 2 and section 3, a choice can be made about which is the most appropriate section to use.

79. Subsection (4) amends the risk criteria for section 5 (detention for six hours pending application for admission) of the Act, again in alignment with the changes to section 2 of the Act.

80. Subsection (5) amends the risk criteria for section 20 (renewal of authority for detention of patient detained in pursuance of application for admission for treatment etc) of the Act, in alignment with the changes to section 3 of the Act so that when a patient's detention is renewed, the new criteria will apply. This change will also apply to Part 3 unrestricted patients, to whom section 20 applies with the modifications in Schedule 1 Part 1.

81. Subsection (6) has the effect of ensuring that the amended risk criteria will apply when a Part 3 patient, who is already subject to orders or directions, has their detention renewed.

82. Subsection (7) amends the interpretation provision (section 145) to include a definition of 'authorised persons' who can detain a patient under the amendments made to sections 2, 3 and 5 of the Act. This definition includes a medical practitioner, approved mental health professional, mental health nurse or doctor, or a person of description specified in regulations made by the Secretary of State.

5
Grounds for detention
15
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 2 (admission for assessment), in subsection (2)—
 
 
(a)
omit the “and” at the end of paragraph (a);
 
 
(b)
for paragraph (b) substitute—
 
 
“(b)
serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of
20
 
the patient or of another person unless the patient is so
 
 
detained by a constable or other authorised person; and
 
 
(c)
given the nature, degree and likelihood of the harm,
 
 
the patient ought to be so detained.”
 
 
(3)
In section 3 (admission for treatment)—
25
 
(a)
in subsection (2), for paragraphs (c) and (d) substitute—
 
 
“(b)
serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of
 
 
the patient or of another person unless the patient
 
 
receives medical treatment,
 
 
(c)
it is necessary, given the nature, degree and likelihood
30
 
of the harm, for the patient to receive medical treatment,
 
 
(d)
the necessary treatment cannot be provided unless the
 
 
patient is detained by a constable or other authorised
 
 
person under this Act, and
 
 
(e)
appropriate medical treatment is available for the
35
 
patient.”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (3)—
 
 
(i)
in paragraph (a), for “(d)” substitute “(e)”;
 
 
(ii)
in paragraph (b), for “(c)” substitute “(b) to (d)”.
 

Page 12

 
(4)
In section 5(4) (detention for six hours pending application for admission),
 
 
for paragraph (a) (but not the “and” at the end) substitute—
 
 
“(a)
that the patient is suffering from mental disorder to such a
 
 
degree that serious harm may be caused to the health or safety
 
 
of the patient or of another person unless the patient is
5
 
immediately restrained from leaving the hospital by a constable
 
 
or other authorised person;”.
 
 
(5)
In section 20 (renewal of authority for detention of patient detained in
 
 
pursuance of application for admission for treatment etc), in subsection (4),
 
 
for paragraphs (c) and (d) substitute—
10
 
“(b)
serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of the
 
 
patient or of another person unless the patient receives medical
 
 
treatment,
 
 
(c)
it is necessary, given the nature, degree and likelihood of the
 
 
harm, for the patient to receive medical treatment,
15
 
(d)
the necessary treatment cannot be provided unless the patient
 
 
continues to be liable to be detained, and
 
 
(e)
appropriate medical treatment is available for the patient.”
 
 
(6)
The amendment made by subsection (5) , so far as relating to persons who
 
 
are liable to be detained by virtue of Part 3 of the Mental Health Act 1983,
20
 
applies in relation to such a person whether the person became so liable
 
 
before or after the coming into force of this section.
 
 
(7)
In section 145(1) (interpretation), at the appropriate place insert—
 
 
““authorised person” means a medical practitioner, approved mental
 
 
health professional, mental health nurse or doctor, or a person of
25
 
description specified in regulations made by the Secretary of State,
 
 
who has been trained and equipped to carry out detentions under this
 
 
Act and who would not be put at unnecessary risk by carrying out
 
 
those functions;”.
 
"Grounds for community treatment orders"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

83. CTOs, introduced as part of the Act in 2007, provide that people subject to section 3 of the Act, who may otherwise remain detained, may be discharged into the community providing they follow certain conditions. CTOs are intended to maintain ongoing contact with mental health services to provide support and help prevent relapse. In certain circumstances, patients subject to a CTO may be recalled to hospital under the Act.

84. Clause 6 amends the criteria for making a CTO under section 17A of the Act, and for renewal of CTOs under section 20A, to align with the new risk criteria for detention. Subsection 2 amends section 17A(5) of the Act to set the same threshold of risk for CTOs as the new risk criteria for detention: firstly that “serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of the patient or of another person" and secondly that the decision maker must consider "the nature, degree and likelihood of the harm,". Subsection (3) substitutes the conditions for renewal of a CTO under section 20A(6) of the Act with the new risk criteria in section 17A(5).

85. This clause also sets out a number of conditions which should be met in order to renew a CTO. The responsible clinician must ensure that CTOs align with the code of practice as set out in section 118(2B). A CTO shall have a maximum duration of 12 months. The responsible clinician may extend the duration of a community treatment order beyond 12 months only after- (i) consulting the patient, the patient's nominated persons, and any relevant mental health care professional involved in the patient's treatment or care planning (ii) undertaking a review process to evaluate the ongoing necessity and therapeutic benefit of the community treatment order (iii) consulting a General Medical Council registered psychiatrist regarding the conditions of the community treatment order and obtaining their written agreement that an extension is necessary and in accordance with the principles set out in section 118(2B).

86. A tribunal may recommend that the responsible clinician consider whether to extend, vary, or terminate the duration and conditions of a community treatment order.

87. Where a community treatment order is extended beyond a period of 12 months, the order shall be subject to review at intervals not exceeding six months.

88. At the conclusion of the default period or any extended period, the responsible clinician must undertake a review to assess the effectiveness of the community treatment order in aligning with the code of practice stipulated in section 118(2B).

89. The purpose of these changes is to ensure that CTOs are only used when there is a risk of serious harm. This change is intended to help prevent the inappropriate use of CTOs.

90. Subsection (4) has the effect of ensuring that the amended criteria for CTOs in subsection 2 applies to Part 3 patients who are already subject to orders or directions. Subsection (5) has the effect of applying the amended criteria in subsection (3) to Part 3 patients who are already subject to a CTO when they are considered for renewal of that CTO.

6
Grounds for community treatment orders
30
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 17A (community treatment orders)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (5) , for paragraphs (b) to (e) substitute—
 
 
“(b)
serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of
 
 
the patient or of another person unless the patient
35
 
receives medical treatment,
 
 
(c)
it is necessary, given the nature, degree and likelihood
 
 
of the harm, for the patient to receive medical treatment,
 
 
(d)
subject to the patient being liable to be recalled as
 
 
mentioned in paragraph (e) , the necessary treatment
40
 
can be provided without the patient being detained in
 
 
a hospital,
 

Page 13

 
(e)
it is necessary that the responsible clinician should be
 
 
able to exercise the power under section 17E(1) to recall
 
 
the patient to hospital, and
 
 
(f)
appropriate medical treatment is available for the
 
 
patient.”
5
 
(b)
in subsection (6) , for “(5)(d)” substitute “(5) (e) ”.
 
 
(3)
In section 17B (conditions) after subsection (7) insert—
 
 
“(8)
The responsible clinician must ensure that community treatment orders
 
 
align with the code of practice as set out in section 118(2B).
 
 
(9)
A community treatment order shall have a maximum duration of 12
10
 
months, subject to the following provisions—
 
 
(a)
the responsible clinician may extend the duration of a
 
 
community treatment order beyond 12 months only after—
 
 
(i)
consulting the patient, the patient’s nominated persons,
 
 
and any relevant mental health care professional
15
 
involved in the patient’s treatment or care planning;
 
 
(ii)
undertaking a review process to evaluate the ongoing
 
 
necessity and therapeutic benefit of the community
 
 
treatment order;
 
 
(iii)
consulting a General Medical Council registered
20
 
psychiatrist regarding the conditions of the community
 
 
treatment order and obtaining their written agreement
 
 
that an extension is necessary and in accordance with
 
 
the principles set out in section 118(2B);
 
 
(b)
community treatment orders with a duration of less than 12
25
 
months are not subject to the review process set out in
 
 
subsection (9)(a)(ii);
 
 
(c)
a tribunal may recommend that the responsible clinician
 
 
consider whether to extend, vary, or terminate the duration
 
 
and conditions of a community treatment order.
30
 
(10)
Where a community treatment order is extended beyond a period of
 
 
12 months, the order shall be subject to review at intervals not
 
 
exceeding six months, in accordance with the procedure set out in
 
 
subsection 9(a).
 
 
(11)
At the conclusion of the default period or any extended period, the
35
 
responsible clinician must undertake a review to assess the effectiveness
 
 
of the community treatment order in aligning with the code of practice
 
 
stipulated in section 118(2B).
 
 
(4)
In section 20A (community treatment period)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (4) (b) , for “conditions set out in subsection (6) below are
40
 
satisfied” substitute “criteria in section 17A(5) are met”;
 
 
(b)
omit subsection (6) ;
 

Page 14

 
(c)
for subsection (7) substitute—
 
 
“(7)
Subsection (6) of section 17A applies for the purposes of
 
 
subsection (4)(b) of this section as it applies for the purposes
 
 
of subsection (4)(a) of that section.”;
 
 
(d)
in subsection (8) (a) , for “conditions set out in subsection (6) above are
5
 
satisfied” substitute “criteria in section 17A(5) are met”.
 
 
(5)
The amendments made by subsection (2) , so far as relating to persons who
 
 
are liable to be detained by virtue of Part 3 of the Mental Health Act 1983
 
 
, apply in relation to such a person whether the person became so liable before
 
 
or after the coming into force of this section .
10
 
(6)
The amendments made by subsection (4) , so far as relating to persons who
 
 
are subject to community treatment orders (within the meaning given by
 
 
section 17A of the Mental Health Act 1983 ) by virtue of Part 3 of that Act
 
 
, apply in relation to such a person whether the person became subject to a
 
 
community treatment order before or after the coming into force of this section .
15
"Grounds for discharge by tribunal"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

91. Clause 7 amends sections 72 and 73 of the Act, which concern the powers of the First-tier Tribunal (Mental Health) and the Mental Health Review Tribunal of Wales (together, the Tribunal) to discharge patients. The changes in clause 7 subsection (2) align the grounds for discharge of a patient by the Tribunal with the revised grounds for detention as provided by clause 4. A Tribunal must discharge a patient where the patient no longer satisfies the revised detention criteria relevant to their detention.

92. The new discharge criteria will apply to unrestricted Part 3 patients, who are discharged under section 72(1)(b), and to restricted patients, who are discharged under section 73, by virtue of clause 7(3). Subsection (4) has the effect of ensuring these provisions will apply for Part 3 patients who are already subject to orders or directions, the next time they come before the Tribunal.

7
Grounds for discharge by tribunal
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 72 (powers of tribunals)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1)(a), for sub-paragraphs (i) and (ii) substitute “that the
 
 
grounds in section 2(2) are made out;”;
20
 
(b)
in subsection (1)(b), for sub-paragraphs (i) to (iia) (but not the “or” at
 
 
the end) substitute—
 
 
“(i)
that the conditions in section 20(4) are met;”;
 
 
(c)
in subsection (1)(c), for sub-paragraphs (i) to (iv) (but not the “or” at
 
 
the end) substitute—
25
 
“(i)
that the criteria in section 17A(5) are met;”;
 
 
(d)
in subsection (1A), for “whether the criterion in subsection (1)(c)(iii)
 
 
above” substitute “for the purposes of subsection (1)(c) (i) whether the
 
 
criterion in section 17A(5) (e) ”.
 
 
(3)
In section 73 (power to discharge restricted patients), in subsection (1)(a), for
30
 
“as to the matters mentioned in paragraph (b)(i), (ii) or (iia) of section 72(1)
 
 
above” substitute “that the conditions in section 20(4) are met”.
 
 
(4)
The amendments made by this section—
 
 
(a)
so far as relating to persons who are liable to be detained by virtue
 
 
of Part 3 of the Mental Health Act 1983, apply in relation to such a
35
 
person whether the person became so liable before or after the coming
 
 
into force of this section;
 
 
(b)
so far as relating to persons who are subject to community treatment
 
 
orders (within the meaning given by section 17A of the Mental Health
 
 
Act 1983) by virtue of Part 3 of that Act, apply in relation to such a
40
 
person whether the person became subject to a community treatment
 
 
order before or after the coming into force of this section.
 

Page 15

Appropriate medical treatment

 
"Appropriate medical treatment: therapeutic benefit"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

93. Clause 8 of the Bill inserts a new requirement into the Act, in line with the principle of therapeutic benefit, that when considering whether medical treatment under the Act is "appropriate" for a patient, consideration must be given to whether there is a reasonable prospect that the outcome of the treatment would have a therapeutic benefit for that patient. The existing definition of "medical treatment" in the Act currently requires any medical treatment for mental disorder to have a therapeutic benefit purpose by virtue of section 145 subsection (4) and the clause moves that definition to the front of the Act, alongside the new definition of "appropriate medical treatment" so that both definitions, and therefore the need for therapeutic benefit to the patient, have a prominent position in the Act. The change will apply to Part 3 patients in the same manner as Part 2.

94. Subsection (2) inserts a new definition of "appropriate medical treatment" into the Act to require that where medical treatment is required under the Act to be "appropriate", the treatment must have a reasonable prospect of alleviating, or preventing the worsening of, the patient's mental disorder or one or more of its symptoms or manifestations, to ensure that therapeutic benefit is considered both in relation to the purpose and likely outcome of the treatment. A “reasonable prospect" is one where there is a reasonable possibility that a patient will derive some benefit from the treatment. This does not require the decision maker to conclude that it is more likely than not that the patient will benefit from the treatment. Further guidance on appropriate medical treatment will be provided in the Code of Practice.

95. This new definition applies to the requirement in the criteria for detention under Part 2 section 3, Part 3, and for CTO under section 17A that 'appropriate treatment' must be available to justify detention. This new definition means that in order for someone to be detained or to be subject to a CTO, there must be a reasonable prospect of the patient's detention or placing on CTO resulting in a therapeutic benefit to the patient, as well as the purpose of the detention or CTO being for a therapeutic benefit.

96. Subsections (3) to (11) of the clause make consequential changes to other provisions of the Act, which make reference to treatment needing to be "appropriate" so that the new definition of "appropriate medical treatment" applies to them.

8
Appropriate medical treatment: therapeutic benefit
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In Part 1 —
 
 
(a)
for the Part heading substitute “Introductory”;
5
 
(b)
after section 1 insert—
 
“1A
“Appropriate medical treatment”
 
 
In this Act—
 
 
(a)
references to appropriate medical treatment, in relation
 
 
to a person suffering from mental disorder, are
10
 
references to medical treatment which, taking into
 
 
account the nature and degree of the disorder and all
 
 
other circumstances—
 
 
(i)
has a reasonable prospect of alleviating, or
 
 
preventing the worsening of, the disorder or one
15
 
or more of its symptoms or manifestations, and
 
 
(ii)
is appropriate in the person’s case;
 
 
(b)
references to medical treatment, in relation to mental
 
 
disorder, are references to medical treatment the
 
 
purpose of which is to alleviate, or prevent a worsening
20
 
of, the disorder or one or more of its symptoms or
 
 
manifestations.”;
 
 
(c)
in section 3 (admission for treatment) omit subsection (4) .
 
 
(3)
In section 57 (treatment requiring consent and a second opinion), in subsection
 
 
(2) (b) , for “it is appropriate for the treatment to be given” substitute “the
25
 
treatment constitutes appropriate medical treatment”.
 
 
(4)
In section 58 (treatment requiring consent or a second opinion), in subsection
 
 
(3) (b) , for “it is appropriate for the treatment to be given” substitute “the
 
 
treatment constitutes appropriate medical treatment”.
 
 
(5)
In section 58A (electro-convulsive therapy etc), in subsection (4) (c) , for
30
 
sub-paragraph (ii) substitute—
 
 
“(ii)
that the treatment constitutes appropriate medical
 
 
treatment.”
 
 
(6)
In section 62A (treatment on recall of community patient or revocation of
 
 
order), in subsection (5) (a) —
35
 
(a)
omit “it is appropriate for”;
 
 
(b)
for “to be given to the patient” substitute “constitute appropriate
 
 
medical treatment”.
 
 
(7)
In section 63 (treatment not requiring consent)—
 
 
(a)
the existing text becomes subsection (1) ;
40

Page 16

 
(b)
in that subsection , after “patient”, insert “who is liable to be detained
 
 
in pursuance of an application for admission for assessment”;
 
 
(c)
after that subsection insert—
 
 
“(2)
The consent of any other patient is not required for any medical
 
 
treatment given to the patient for such disorder, not being a
5
 
form of treatment to which section 57, 58 or 58A above applies,
 
 
if—
 
 
(a)
the treatment is given by or under the direction of the
 
 
approved clinician in charge of the treatment, and
 
 
(b)
the approved clinician in charge of the treatment
10
 
considers that the treatment constitutes appropriate
 
 
medical treatment.”.
 
 
(8)
In section 64 (supplementary provisions for Part 4) omit subsection (3) .
 
 
(9)
In section 64C (section 64B: supplemental), in subsection (4) (a) , for “it is
 
 
appropriate for the treatment to be given or for the treatment to be” substitute
15
 
“the treatment constitutes appropriate medical treatment or constitutes
 
 
appropriate medical treatment if”.
 
 
(10)
In section 64K (interpretation of Part 4A) omit subsection (8) .
 
 
(11)
In section 145 (interpretation)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1) —
20
 
(i)
at the appropriate place insert—
 
 
““appropriate medical treatment” is to be read in accordance
 
 
with section 1A (a) ;”;
 
 
(ii)
in the definition of “medical treatment”, for “(but see also
 
 
subsection (4) below)” substitute “; and references to medical
25
 
treatment are to be read in accordance with section 1A (b) ”;
 
 
(b)
omit subsection (1AB) ;
 
 
(c)
omit subsection (4) .
 
"Remission or release of prisoners etc from hospital: treatment condition"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

97. Sections 50 to 53 of the Act provide for the remission of prisoners or other detainees with severe mental health needs back to their prison or other place of detention (or, where relevant, their release) where no effective treatment for the mental disorder can be given. This test differs slightly from the detention criteria in the rest of the Act and is distinguished because these patients in practice may refuse to engage with treatment or behave in a disruptive manner such that treatment cannot practically be given. These provisions allow for remission in cases where treatment is available as a general concept, but the circumstances mean it cannot be given to the patient.

98. Clause 9 retains the 'can be given' aspect of the test but standardises the type of treatment to 'appropriate medical treatment' for consistency with the rest of the Act. In practice, this change has no practical or legal effect and is technical in nature.

9
Remission or release of prisoners etc from hospital: treatment condition
 
 
In the Mental Health Act 1983, in the following places, for “effective” substitute
30
 
“appropriate medical”—
 
 
section 50(1) (prisoners under sentence);
 
 
section 51(3)(b) and (4)(b) (detained persons);
 
 
section 52(5)(b) (persons remanded by magistrates’ courts);
 
 
section 53(2)(b) (civil prisoners and persons detained under the
35
 
Immigration Acts).
 

Page 17

The responsible clinician

 
"Nomination of the responsible clinician"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

99. A responsible clinician is an approved clinician (a mental health professional, usually a consultant psychiatrist, approved by, or on behalf of, the Secretary of State for the purposes of the Mental Health Act, with statutory roles and responsibilities). The responsible clinician has the overall responsibility for a patient's case under the Act. Certain decisions, such as renewing a patient's detention or placing a patient on supervised community treatment, can only be taken by the responsible clinician.

100. Clause 10 makes two amendments to section 34 subsection (1) (Interpretation of Part 2) of the Act which contains definitions of certain terms used within the Act. The amendments are firstly (a), which adds a new term "relevant hospital", to mean either the hospital that a patient is liable to be detained in or, for a patient on a CTO, the hospital which is responsible for them, and secondly (b), which extends the definition of “responsible clinician" to specify that the responsible clinician has overall responsibility for a patient's care as now, but with the added provision that this is because the managers of the "relevant hospital" have nominated the responsible clinician.

101. Subsections (3) to (6) then make consequential amendments throughout the Act to apply this extended definition of the responsible clinician.

102. The amendment to the definition of "responsible clinician" to refer to a nomination by the hospital managers seeks simply to clarify the current position in relation to how a responsible clinician is assigned overall responsibility for a patient's care and makes no practical change to the role of a responsible clinician or how they are appointed. This is intended to clarify the distinction between the definition and role of the responsible clinician and the new definition of "community clinician" who will have an increased role in relation to patients on CTOs. The responsible clinician would retain overall responsibility for the patient's case. Further detail on the role of the community clinician can be found at clause 21 (Consultation of the community clinician).

10
Nomination of the responsible clinician
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 34(1) (interpretation of Part 2)—
 
 
(a)
at the appropriate place insert—
5
 
““the relevant hospital” means—
 
 
(a)
in relation to a patient who is liable to be detained in
 
 
a hospital, that hospital;
 
 
(b)
in relation to a community patient, the responsible
 
 
hospital;”;
10
 
(b)
in the definition of “the responsible clinician”, in paragraph (a), for
 
 
“with” substitute “nominated by the managers of the relevant hospital
 
 
to have”.
 
 
(3)
In the following places, after “would” insert “be nominated by the managers
 
 
of the hospital to”—
15
 
section 36(3) (remand for treatment only if admission is arranged);
 
 
section 37(4) (hospital order to be made only if admission is arranged);
 
 
section 38(4) (interim hospital order to be made only if admission is
 
 
arranged);
 
 
section 44(2) (evidence for admission to hospital by magistrates’ court);
20
 
section 45A(5) (hospital direction and limitation direction to be made
 
 
only if admission is arranged).
 
 
(4)
In section 55(1) (interpretation of Part 3), in the definition of “responsible
 
 
clinician”, for “with” substitute “nominated by the managers of the hospital
 
 
to have”.
25
 
(5)
In section 64 (supplementary provisions for Part 4), for subsection (1)
 
 
substitute—
 
 
“(1)
In this Part—
 
 
“hospital” includes a registered establishment;
 
 
“responsible clinician” means the responsible clinician within the
30
 
meaning of Part 2 (see section 34(1)).”
 
 
(6)
In section 134(1), in the words after paragraph (b), for “with” substitute
 
 
“nominated by the managers of the hospital to have”.
 

Treatment

 
"Making treatment decisions"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

104. Clause 11 amends the Act to insert section 56A. This introduces a duty on the approved clinician in charge of the patient's treatment to consider certain matters and take a number of steps when deciding whether to give treatment under Part 4. The duty applies to all treatment given under Part 4 of the Act to any patient, including patients who are consenting, lacking capacity or competence to consent, or withholding consent to treatment.

105. The duty or 'clinical checklist' includes, among other things, the need to consider the patient's past and present wishes and feelings as far as reasonably ascertainable, take reasonably practicable steps to assist and to encourage the patient to participate in treatment decisions, consult those people close to the patient, and identify and evaluate any alternative forms of medical treatment (see subsection (1)). The intention of this clause is to help ensure that, as far as possible, clinical decisions are tailored to the patient's wishes, preferences, and individual needs (including those expressed in the past, for example in an Advance Choice Document or any other relevant written statement made by the patient when they had the relevant capacity), in line with the guiding principle of choice and autonomy. This is to address the fact that some patients have reported in the past that that their wishes have not been given proper consideration, or that insufficient efforts have been made to establish what it is that they want.

106. Subsection (2) of the duty means that, where the patient lacks the relevant capacity or competence, the clinician must in addition to the matters mentioned in subsection (1)- consider any wishes, feelings, views or beliefs they think the patient might have had, if they had the relevant capacity or competence to consent to treatment. This is to ensure that, even where a patient is considered to lack capacity or competence to consent to treatment, efforts are still made to personalise their treatment by, for example, looking at their medical history or past expressions of their wishes and feelings (e.g. those recorded in an Advance Choice Document or any other relevant written statement made by the patient when they had the relevant capacity).

107. Clause 11 also amends other provisions in Part 4 so that, where certification of any treatment is required under the Act, the second opinion appointed doctor or, if applicable, the approved clinician, must confirm in writing whether treatment was given in accordance with the duty under s.56A (sub (3)-(5)) (i.e. the clinical checklist). This is to ensure that the new clinical checklist is followed and that there is written evidence of it having been completed by the approved clinician in charge of the patient's treatment.

11
Making treatment decisions
35
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 

Page 18

 
(2)
After section 56 insert—
 
“56A
Making treatment decisions
 
 
(1)
In deciding whether to give medical treatment to a patient by virtue
 
 
of this Part, the approved clinician in charge of the treatment must—
 
 
(a)
identify and evaluate any alternative forms of medical treatment
5
 
available for the patient;
 
 
(b)
take such steps as are reasonably practicable to assist and
 
 
encourage the patient to participate, as fully as possible, in the
 
 
decision-making process;
 
 
(c)
not rely merely on—
10
 
(i)
the patient's age or appearance, or
 
 
(ii)
a condition of the patient’s, or an aspect of the patient’s
 
 
behaviour, which might lead others to make unjustified
 
 
assumptions about what medical treatment might be
 
 
appropriate for the patient;
15
 
(d)
consider the patient’s past and present wishes, feelings, beliefs
 
 
and values, so far as it is reasonable to regard them as relevant
 
 
and so far as they are reasonably ascertainable;
 
 
(e)
consider the relevant views of the following, so far as they are
 
 
reasonably ascertainable—
20
 
(i)
anyone named by the patient as someone to be
 
 
consulted on the decision in question, or decisions of
 
 
that kind;
 
 
(ii)
the patient’s nominated person and any independent
 
 
mental health advocate from whom the patient is
25
 
receiving help by virtue of section 130A or 130E;
 
 
(iii)
any donee or deputy for the patient;
 
 
(iv)
any other person who cares for the patient or is
 
 
interested in the patient’s welfare and whom the
 
 
approved clinician considers it appropriate to consult;
30
 
(f)
consider all other circumstances of which the approved clinician
 
 
is aware and which it would be reasonable to regard as
 
 
relevant.
 
 
(2)
Where the patient lacks capacity in relation to matters that, in the
 
 
opinion of the approved clinician, are relevant to the decision, the
35
 
approved clinician must also consider any wishes, feelings, views and
 
 
beliefs that the clinician thinks the patient would have in relation to
 
 
those matters but for the lack of capacity (including any relevant
 
 
written statement made by the patient when they had capacity).
 
 
(3)
In subsection (1) (e) , “relevant views” means—
40
 
(a)
views about the nature of the patient’s past and present wishes,
 
 
feelings, beliefs and values,
 
 
(b)
where the patient lacks capacity in relation to matters that, in
 
 
the opinion of the approved clinician, are relevant to the
 
 
decision, views about the nature of the wishes, feelings, views
45

Page 19

 
and beliefs the patient would have in relation to those matters
 
 
but for the lack of capacity, and
 
 
(c)
views about whether the medical treatment should be given
 
 
to the patient.”
 
 
(3)
In section 57 (treatment requiring consent and a second opinion), in subsection
5
 
(2)(b), at the end insert “, and that the decision to give the treatment was
 
 
made by the person in charge of the treatment in accordance with section
 
 
56A ”.
 
 
(4)
In section 58 (treatment requiring consent or a second opinion)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (3)(a), at the end (but before the “; or”) insert “, and that
10
 
the decision to give the treatment was made by the approved clinician
 
 
in charge of the treatment in accordance with section 56A ”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (3)(b), at the end insert “, and that the decision to give
 
 
the treatment was made by the approved clinician in charge of the
 
 
treatment in accordance with section 56A ”.
15
 
(5)
In section 58A (electro-convulsive therapy etc)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (3)(c), at the end insert “, and that the decision to give
 
 
the treatment was made by the approved clinician in charge of the
 
 
treatment in accordance with section 56A ”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (4)(c)—
20
 
(i)
omit the “and” at the end of sub-paragraph (i);
 
 
(ii)
at the end of sub-paragraph (ii) insert “; and”;
 
 
(iii)
after sub-paragraph (ii) insert—
 
 
“(iii)
that the decision to give the treatment
 
 
was made by the approved clinician in
25
 
charge of the treatment in accordance
 
 
with section 56A .”
 
"Appointment of doctors to provide second opinions"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

108. Clause 12 amends the Act by inserting new section 56(B) to clarify the role of the regulatory authority (the Care Quality Commission (CQC) in England and in Wales, the Care Inspectorate Wales) in appointing a second opinion appointed doctor, referred to currently in the Act as a 'registered medical practitioner appointed for the purposes of this Part of the Act by the regulatory authority'.

109. The second opinion appointed doctor acts independently, and under the Bill's measures will be responsible for assessing if, for instance, the patient's compulsory treatment has a therapeutic benefit (in line with the new definition of appropriate treatment in clause 8). In addition, they will need to assess if the new duty on clinicians to follow a clinical checklist, which includes (among other things) consideration of the patient's past and present wishes and preferences and an evaluation of available treatment alternatives, has been followed. By making it the responsibility of the second opinion appointed doctor to provide an independent check on whether these new and important safeguards are upheld, we further embed the principles of therapeutic benefit and choice and autonomy in clinical decision making.

12
Appointment of doctors to provide second opinions
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
After section 56A (inserted by section 11 of this Act) insert—
30
“56B
Appointment of doctors to provide second opinions
 
 
(1)
Where, in relation to a patient, a function under this Part is to be
 
 
performed by a “second opinion appointed doctor” (whether because
 
 
this Part requires it to be so performed or because a decision has been
 
 
made under this Part that it will be so performed)—
35
 
(a)
the relevant person must request that the regulatory authority
 
 
appoint a person to perform the function in relation to the
 
 
patient, and
 
 
(b)
on receiving the request, the regulatory authority must, as soon
 
 
as reasonably practicable (subject to section 62ZA (8) ), appoint
40
 
a person to perform the function in relation to the patient.
 
 
(2)
The person appointed by the regulatory authority—
 

Page 20

 
(a)
must be a registered medical practitioner, and
 
 
(b)
must not be the patient’s responsible clinician or the person
 
 
in charge of the treatment that is to be given to the patient.
 
 
(3)
In this section “the relevant person” means—
 
 
(a)
if there is a responsible clinician for the patient, the responsible
5
 
clinician;
 
 
(b)
otherwise, the person in charge of the treatment that is to be
 
 
given to the patient.”
 
 
(3)
In section 57 (treatment requiring consent and a second opinion)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (2)(a), for the words from the beginning to “question)”
10
 
substitute “a second opinion appointed doctor”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (2)(b), for the words from the beginning to “above”
 
 
substitute “the second opinion appointed doctor”;
 
 
(c)
in subsection (3), for “the registered medical practitioner concerned”
 
 
substitute “the second opinion appointed doctor”.
15
 
(4)
In section 58 (treatment requiring consent or a second opinion)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (3)(a), for the words from “a registered” to “authority”
 
 
substitute “a second opinion appointed doctor”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (3)(b), for the words from the beginning to “question)”
 
 
substitute “a second opinion appointed doctor”.
20
 
(5)
In section 58A (electro-convulsive therapy etc)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (3)(c), for the words from “a registered” to “above”
 
 
substitute “a second opinion appointed doctor”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (4)(c), for the words from the beginning to “treatment)”
 
 
substitute “a second opinion appointed doctor”;
25
 
(c)
in subsection (6), in the words before paragraph (a), for “the registered
 
 
medical practitioner” substitute “the second opinion appointed doctor”.
 
 
(6)
In section 64 (supplementary provisions for Part 4), in subsection (1) (as
 
 
substituted by section 10 of this Act), at the appropriate place insert—
 
 
““second opinion appointed doctor” is to be read in accordance with
30
 
section 56B”.
 
 
(7)
In section 64C (section 64B: supplemental)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (4)(a), for the words from the beginning to “treatment)”
 
 
substitute “a second opinion appointed doctor”;
 
 
(b)
after subsection (9) insert—
35
 
“(10)
In this section “second opinion appointed doctor” has the same
 
 
meaning as in Part 4 (see section 64).”
 
 
(8)
In section 119 (practitioners approved for Part 4 and section 118), in subsection
 
 
(1), after “Act” insert “(see section 56B )”.
 

Page 21

"Medicine etc: treatment conflicting with a decision by or on behalf of a"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

112. Clause 13 amends the Act to insert section 57A. This introduces new safeguards for patients who are refusing medical treatment either with capacity or competence at the time, or in a valid and applicable advance decision (which may be expressed as part of someone's Advance Choice Document), or where treatment is in conflict with a decision made by a donee or deputy or the Court of Protection (see subsection (1)). These safeguards only apply to medical treatment for mental disorder falling in the scope of section 58, and those that may be specified in regulations made under section 58 subsection (1)(a). The intention of these new safeguards, particularly those that recognise well-established provisions that exist in the Mental Capacity Act 2005, is to strengthen the patient's influence over their care and treatment, thereby further supporting the principle of choice and autonomy.

113. Section 57A, subsection (3) sets out that, where section 57A applies, and the urgent circumstances under section 62 are not met, then the patient may not be given any forms of medical treatment unless there is a 'compelling reason' to give the treatment and a second opinion appointed doctor has provided certification. In this context, 'compelling reason' constitutes either that no other alternative forms of appropriate medical treatment are available for the patient's mental disorder, or that alternative forms of appropriate medical treatment are available, but the patient has not consented, or they are in conflict with a valid and applicable advance decision, or a decision made by a donee or deputy or the Court of Protection (see subsection (4)). The intention of this part of the clause is to ensure that the approved clinician gives proper consideration to all other avenues of medical treatment that they consider viable, with a view to finding a medication that the patient is content with (or is likely to be content with, where the patient lacks capacity or competence).

114. Where the clinician in charge of the patient's treatment considers that the 'compelling reason' test is met, a certificate provided by the second opinion appointed doctor must confirm the following in order for treatment to be given: that the treatment in question is appropriate (under the new definition of "appropriate medical treatment" in clause 8); that the decision to give treatment was made by the approved clinician in line with the new duty to follow a clinical checklist under section 56A; and that in respect of any available alternative treatment either the patient has not given valid consent or that they appear to conflict with a valid and applicable advance decision or a decision made by a donee or deputy or the Court of Protection. It should be noted that, in line with current practice relating to section 58 certificates, the second opinion appointed doctor's certificate may relate to a plan of treatment including one or more forms of treatment or classes or treatment. The exact contents of the certificate will depend on the nature of the patient's refusal and wider circumstances. Subsection (5) further requires that the second opinion appointed doctor must consult two other people who have been professionally concerned with the patient's medical treatment, as part of the certification process. These changes to the second opinion appointed doctor's responsibilities enhance their role in enforcing new safeguards which support the principles of choice and autonomy and therapeutic benefit.

115. This clause requires that the approved clinician secures the second opinion appointed doctor's certification before treatment is given. This is a significant change from the current legislation, which allows for the use of compulsory medication for a period of three months before assessment by a second opinion appointed doctor is required. By making it so that the second opinion appointed doctor's certification is necessary before medication can be administered in the face of the patient's refusal or the decision of a donee or deputy or the Court of Protection, the intention is that treating clinicians place more value on finding a medication that is acceptable to the patient. A potential result from this is that we see a reduction in the use of compulsory medical treatment where this is in conflict with a patient's refusal and where there isn't a good rationale for administering compulsory treatment, which we know has a negative impact on patient experience.

 
13
Medicine etc: treatment conflicting with a decision by or on behalf of a
 

patient

 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
After section 57 insert—
 
 
“57A
Treatment without consent requiring a second opinion and a
5
 
compelling reason
 
 
(1)
This section applies to the forms of medical treatment for relevant
 
 
disorder mentioned in subsection (2) where—
 
 
(a)
the patient has capacity to consent to the treatment but has not
 
 
consented to it, or
10
 
(b)
the patient lacks capacity to consent to the treatment, and the
 
 
giving of the treatment would conflict with—
 
 
(i)
a valid and applicable advance decision, or
 
 
(ii)
a decision of a donee or deputy or the Court of
 
 
Protection.
15
 
(2)
The forms of medical treatment referred to in subsection (1) are—
 
 
(a)
such forms of treatment as may be specified in regulations
 
 
made under section 58(1)(a);
 
 
(b)
the administration of medicine to a patient by any means (not
 
 
being a form of treatment specified under section 57, section
20
 
58(1)(a) or section 58A(1)(b)) at any time during a period for
 
 
which the patient is liable to be detained as a patient to whom
 
 
this Part of this Act applies.
 
 
(3)
Where this section applies, and subject to section 62, a patient may
 
 
not be given any of those forms of medical treatment unless there is
25
 
a compelling reason to give treatment of that form and a second
 
 
opinion appointed doctor has certified in writing—
 
 
(a)
that the treatment constitutes appropriate medical treatment,
 
 
(b)
that the decision to give the treatment was made by the
 
 
approved clinician in charge of the treatment in accordance
30
 
with section 56A , and
 
 
(c)
that, in relation to the form of treatment and any alternative
 
 
forms of appropriate medical treatment that are available for
 
 
the patient’s relevant disorder (taking each form of treatment
 
 
separately)—
35
 
(i)
the patient has capacity to consent but has not
 
 
consented, or
 
 
(ii)
the patient lacks capacity to consent and it appears to
 
 
the second opinion appointed doctor that there is a
 
 
decision mentioned in subsection (1) (b) (i) or (ii) which,
40
 
if valid, would conflict with the giving of the treatment.
 
 
(4)
For the purposes of this section there is a “compelling reason” to give
 
 
a form of medical treatment to a patient if—
 

Page 22

 
(a)
alternative forms of appropriate medical treatment are available
 
 
for the patient’s relevant disorder but, in relation to each of
 
 
those forms—
 
 
(i)
the patient has not consented, or
 
 
(ii)
the patient lacks capacity to consent and the giving of
5
 
the treatment would conflict with a decision mentioned
 
 
in subsection (1) (b) (i) or (ii) , or
 
 
(b)
no alternative forms of appropriate medical treatment are
 
 
available for the patient’s relevant disorder.
 
 
(5)
Before giving a certificate under subsection (3) the second opinion
10
 
appointed doctor must consult two other persons who have been
 
 
professionally concerned with the patient’s medical treatment but, of
 
 
those persons—
 
 
(a)
one must be a nurse and the other must be neither a nurse nor
 
 
a registered medical practitioner, and
15
 
(b)
neither may be the responsible clinician or the approved
 
 
clinician in charge of the treatment in question.”
 
 
(3)
In section 58 (treatment requiring consent or a second opinion)—
 
 
(a)
before subsection (1) insert—
 
 
“(A1)
This section applies to the forms of medical treatment for
20
 
relevant disorder mentioned in subsection (1) where—
 
 
(a)
the patient has capacity to consent to the treatment and
 
 
has consented to it, or
 
 
(b)
the patient lacks capacity to consent to the treatment
 
 
and the giving of the treatment would not conflict
25
 
with—
 
 
(i)
any valid and applicable advance decision, or
 
 
(ii)
any decision of a donee or deputy or the Court
 
 
of Protection.”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (1), for the words before paragraph (a) substitute “The
30
 
forms of medical treatment referred to in subsection (A1) are—”;
 
 
(c)
in subsection (3)(b) omit “or being so capable has not consented to it”.
 
 
(4)
In section 59 (plans of treatment), after “57” insert “, 57A”.
 
 
(5)
In section 60 (withdrawal of consent), in subsection (1C)(a), after “section”
 
 
insert “57A,”.
35
 
(6)
In section 62 (urgent treatment), in subsection (2), after “57” insert “, 57A”.
 
 
(7)
In section 63 (treatment not requiring consent), for the words from “not”, in
 
 
the second place it occurs, to “applies” substitute “where none of sections 57
 
 
to 58A apply”.
 
 
(8)
In section 64C (section 64B: supplemental)—
40
 
(a)
for subsection (3) substitute—
 
 
“(3)
Relevant treatment is—
 
 
(a)
section 58 type treatment if it is—
 

Page 23

 
(i)
treatment of a form which, at the time when it
 
 
is given to the patient, is specified under section
 
 
58(1)(a), or
 
 
(ii)
the administration of medicine to the patient by
 
 
any means (not being a form of treatment
5
 
specified under section 57, section 58(1)(a) or
 
 
section 58A(1)(b)) if a period equal to or longer
 
 
than the section 58 period has elapsed since the
 
 
first occasion, during the relevant period, when
 
 
medicine was administered to the patient by any
10
 
means for relevant disorder;
 
 
(b)
section 58A type treatment if it is—
 
 
(i)
electro-convulsive therapy, or
 
 
(ii)
treatment of a form which, at the time when it
 
 
is given to the patient, is specified under section
15
 
58A(1)(b).
 
 
(3A)
For the purposes of subsection (3)—
 
 
(a)
the “section 58 period” is the period which, at the time
 
 
when the treatment is given to the patient, is specified
 
 
under section 58(1)(b);
20
 
(b)
the “relevant period” is the period during which the
 
 
patient has continuously been a patient to whom this
 
 
Part applies.”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (6), for “subsection (1)(a) of that section” substitute
 
 
“subsection (3) (b) (i) of this section”;
25
 
(c)
in subsection (7)—
 
 
(i)
for “subsection (1)(b) of that section” substitute “subsection
 
 
(3) (b) (ii) of this section”;
 
 
(ii)
for “that section”, in the second place it occurs, substitute
 
 
“section 58A(1)(b)”.
30
"Medicine etc: treatment in other circumstances"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

116. Clause 14 amends section 58 of the Act to shorten the 'three-month time-period', after which certification must be provided, to two months. This new time period applies where the patient has capacity or competence in respect of the treatment and consents; or where the patient lacks capacity/competence in respect of the treatment (and there is no conflict with any valid and applicable advance decision, or a decision made by a donee or deputy or by the Court of Protection). By bringing forward the second opinion appointed doctor's assessment to two months, the use of compulsory medication where the patient lacks capacity/competence to consent, receives independent scrutiny at an earlier point in the patient's treatment course. This helps to ensure that the patient's right to self-determination is being upheld and that the treatment is delivering a therapeutic benefit.

117. Where a patient lacks capacity or competence to consent and the compelling reasons test applies within the first two months of medical treatment, to avoid the second opinion appointed doctor's providing two separate certificates (i.e. one to certify the absence of capacity or competence at two months and one to certify treatment under section 57A), the second opinion appointed doctor is able to provide a single combined certificate covering both issues. This may help to streamline responsibilities on the second opinion appointed doctor's service and minimise administrative burden.

14
Medicine etc: treatment in other circumstances
 
 
In section 58 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (treatment requiring consent or
 
 
a second opinion)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1) (b) , for “three” substitute “two”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (3) (a) , after “has consented to it” insert “, that the
35
 
treatment constitutes appropriate medical treatment”;
 
 
(c)
in subsection (4) , for “(3)(b) above the registered medical practitioner
 
 
concerned” substitute “(3) the person giving the certificate”.
 
"Electro-convulsive therapy etc"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

118. This clause amends section 58A (which currently only applies to electro-convulsive therapy) such that it is no longer the role of the second opinion appointed doctor to certify that the decision to administer electro-convulsive therapy is not in conflict with any valid and applicable advance decision, or a decision of an attorney or deputy or the Court of Protection. Instead, this will need to be established by the patient's approved clinician, who will then decide if referral to a second opinion appointed doctor is applicable. This is different to the approach taken under section 57A, where the second opinion appointed doctor is required to certify the presence of valid and applicable advance decision, or decision of an attorney or deputy or the court, before treatment can be given. The main reason for this difference is that, in the case of section 57A, the contents of the advance decision or decision of an attorney or deputy or the court are integral to establishing if a certificate should be issued to permit the use of compulsory treatment, while in the case electro-convulsive therapy the simple presence of an advance decision, or decision of an attorney or deputy or court to refuse electro-convulsive therapy should prevent the use of this treatment.

119. If the approved clinician finds that treatment would not conflict with any of the above, but that the patient lacks capacity to consent, then the second opinion appointed doctor must certify the following before treatment can be given: that the patient lacks capacity to consent; that the treatment is appropriate; and that the decision to give treatment was made in line with section 56A. Compared to the second opinion appointed doctor's current role, under the Bill they will have to apply the new definition of appropriate medical treatment (see clause 7), which puts a greater emphasis on ensuring therapeutic benefit to the patient, and they will need to ascertain if the treating approved clinician has followed the new clinical checklist in coming to their decision to administer electro-convulsive therapy, thereby helping to embed the guiding principle of choice and autonomy.

15
Electro-convulsive therapy etc
 
 
In section 58A of the Mental Health Act 1983 (electro-convulsive therapy etc),
40
 
for subsection (5) substitute—
 
 
“(5)
A patient falls within this subsection if—
 

Page 24

 
(a)
the patient lacks capacity to consent to the treatment and the
 
 
giving of the treatment would not conflict with—
 
 
(i)
any valid and applicable advance decision, or
 
 
(ii)
any decision of a donee or deputy or the Court of
 
 
Protection, and
5
 
(b)
a second opinion appointed doctor has certified in writing—
 
 
(i)
that the patient lacks capacity to consent to the
 
 
treatment,
 
 
(ii)
that the treatment constitutes appropriate medical
 
 
treatment, and
10
 
(iii)
that the decision to give the treatment was made by
 
 
the approved clinician in charge of the treatment in
 
 
accordance with section 56A .”
 
"Review of treatment"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

120. Clause 16 makes changes to section 61 of the Act to set out the timing at which a report must be provided by the approved clinician to the regulatory authority (in England the CQC, in Wales the Healthcare Inspectorate Wales (HIW)) on the patient's treatment and their condition, where they are not consenting to treatment, so that it is after six months, then six months, then 12 months, within two months of these timeframes. This includes Part 3 patients who have been transferred from guardianship under section 19 regulations, and Part 3 patients who have had a community treatment order revoked after 6 months has passed since their hospital order (new 61(1B). Part 3 CTO-revoked patients within 6 months of their hospital order, and all other Part 3 patients, will retain their existing reporting periods (new 61(1C), bringing all patients into line. This is in line with the current legislation, which requires that a report is provided at the point of each detention renewal, as per section 20, with the exception of the first renewal of section which under the Bill would be at 3 months for relevant cohorts.

121. This clause also gives the regulatory authority the power to require that the approved clinician provides them with a report on the patient's treatment and their condition, where the patient is found to be consenting to treatment falling under section 58A and section 58. If the regulatory authority identifies any concerns, they have the power to require further reports from the approved clinician.

16
Review of treatment
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
15
 
(2)
In section 61 (review of treatment)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1)—
 
 
(i)
in the words before paragraph (a), for “58(3)(b) or 58A(4) or
 
 
(5)” substitute “57A(3), 58(3)(b) or 58A(5)”;
 
 
(ii)
in paragraph (a), after “patient” insert “, except that, in the case
20
 
of a patient who is liable to be detained in pursuance of an
 
 
application for admission for treatment, no report is required
 
 
under this subsection on the first occasion on which the
 
 
responsible clinician furnishes a report under section 20(3) in
 
 
respect of them”;
25
 
(b)
after subsection (1) insert—
 
 
“(1A)
Where a patient is given treatment in accordance with section
 
 
58(3)(a) or 58A(3) or (4), a report on the treatment and the
 
 
patient’s condition must be given by the approved clinician in
 
 
charge of the treatment to the regulatory authority at any time,
30
 
if so required by the regulatory authority.
 
 
(1B)
In relation to a patient to whom paragraph 5B or 5D of Part 1
 
 
of Schedule 1 applies, subsection (1) has effect as if, in
 
 
paragraph (a), for the words “application for admission for
 
 
treatment” there were substituted “order under Part 3 of this
35
 
Act”.
 
 
(1C)
In relation to a patient to whom paragraph 5C or 6 of Part 1
 
 
of Schedule 1 applies, subsection (1) has effect as if, in
 
 
paragraph (a), the words from “, except that” to the end of that
 
 
paragraph were omitted.”;
40
 
(c)
in subsection (3)—
 
 
(i)
for “58(3)(b)” substitute “57A(3), 58(3)”;
 
 
(ii)
for “58A(4)” substitute “58A(3), (4)”;
 
 
(iii)
for “sections 57” substitute “sections 57, 57A”.
 

Page 25

 
(3)
In section 55, in subsection (4), after “section 42 above or” insert “section
 
 
61 (1B) or”.
 
"Urgent treatment to alleviate serious suffering"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

122. Clause 17 removes the power to administer urgent treatment to patients with the relevant capacity or competence on the basis that it is considered immediately necessary to alleviate serious suffering by the patient, as is currently permissible under section 62 of the Act. In practice, this change allows patients who have capacity or competence at the time to decide on the degree of suffering they are willing to accept, strengthening the patient's right to self-determination and thereby further embedding the principle of choice and autonomy. This change does not apply to patients who lack the relevant capacity, including those who made an advance decision. This clause otherwise seeks to maintain the ability to administer compulsory medication in urgent circumstances, providing a backstop for exceptional situations.

17
Urgent treatment to alleviate serious suffering
 
 
In section 62 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (urgent treatment)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1), for “Sections 57 and 58” substitute “Section 57”;
5
 
(b)
after subsection (1) insert—
 
 
“(1ZA)
Sections 57A and 58 do not apply to—
 
 
(a)
any treatment which falls within paragraphs (a), (b) or
 
 
(d) of subsection (1), or
 
 
(b)
any treatment which falls within paragraph (c) of
10
 
subsection (1) and is given to a patient who lacks
 
 
capacity to consent to the treatment.”
 
"Urgent electro-convulsive therapy etc"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

123. Clause 18 inserts new section 62ZA, which introduces additional safeguards for patients where the approved clinician wishes to overrule their refusal of urgent section 58A treatments (currently just electro-convulsive therapy) made with capacity/competence, either at the time or in a valid and applicable advance decision, or where the urgent treatment would conflict with the valid decision of a donee or deputy, or a decision of the Court of Protection.

124. Subsection (2) permits an approved clinician to administer treatment if the patient has consented with capacity or if the patient has refused with capacity but, a second opinion appointed doctor has certified the treatment. Subsection (3) permits treatment if the patient lacks capacity to consent or if the patient lacks capacity, but the treatment conflicts with a valid and applicable advance decision, or a decision of a donee, deputy or the Court of Protection and a second opinion appointed doctor has certified the treatment.

125. According to subsection (4) and subsection (5) the certificate must confirm the following: the patient's capacity/competence and that the decision to give treatment conflicts with their refusal either made at the time or in a valid and applicable advance decision or by a donee or deputy or the Court of Protection; that the decision to give treatment was made by the clinician in charge in accordance with section 56A; and that the relevant urgent criteria in section 62 are met. Current legislation allows urgent electro-convulsive therapy to be administered by the approved clinician without the certification of a second opinion appointed doctor. By requiring the external scrutiny of a second opinion appointed doctor where treatment is being given in the face of a refusal, the patient's autonomy is further protected, and it is better ensured that urgent electro-convulsive therapy is only administered when there is a strong justification for doing so. We recognise that, again, this approach diverges from the changes made under Clause 15. That is because, in this case, the presence of an advance decision does not prevent the use of treatment, and the contents of the advance decision may be important to establishing if a certificate should be issued to permit the use of compulsory treatment.

126. Subsection (6) requires that, before giving a certificate, the second opinion appointed doctor must, if practicable to do so, consult with a nurse who has been professionally concerned with the patient's medical treatment, who is neither the responsible clinician nor the approved clinician in charge of the treatment in question, as well as the patient's nominated person (see clause 23). Consultation with the nurse is to provide a clinical perspective on the patient's condition and the necessity of the treatment in question, which is separate to that of the approved clinician's. Consultation with the Nominated Person is so that the second opinion appointed doctor can independently gain an understanding of the patient's wishes and feeling, beliefs and values, particularly where the patient is too unwell to engage with the second opinion appointed doctor at the time.

127. Due to the urgent nature of the second opinion appointed doctor's role, subsection (7) states that the request must be made as soon as is reasonably practicable, so that the regulatory authority (in England the CQC, in Wales the Healthcare Inspectorate Wales (HIW)) can, in turn, appoint a second opinion appointed doctor as soon as possible.

128. Clause 18 inserts new section 62ZB which sets out that, where the regulatory authority determines that there are exceptional circumstances, which mean that there will be a delay in appointing a second opinion doctor, the second opinion function may be carried out instead by the approved clinician in charge of the patient's treatment. The appropriate clinician must consider the treatment immediately necessary to save the patient's life. Treatment is no longer permitted in reliance on a certificate given by the approved clinician once a second opinion doctor has been appointed under section 56B. The reason for this 'back-stop' is to allow for treatment to go ahead, in the rare instances where the second opinion appointed doctor is unexpectedly prevented from undertaking their role and it is not possible to appoint another second opinion appointed doctor in a safe time period.

129. To ensure that these limited occasions are monitored, each time a patient is given treatment in reliance on a certificate given by the approved clinician, the managers of the hospital or registered establishment in which the treatment is given must notify the regulator as soon as reasonably practicable. The regulator must then report on this in their annual report under section 120D, as set out in subsection (4). Specifically, they must report on the number of times there was a delay in appointing a second opinion appointed doctor, the reasons for this, and how many times the hospital administered treatment in reliance on a certificate given by the approved clinician.

130. Section 62ZC gives the appropriate national authority the power to impose duties on the following by way of regulations: (a) the managers of hospitals or registered establishments; (b) approved clinicians, or (c) the regulatory authority, for the purpose of ensuring that the second opinion appointed doctor's certificate of treatment is given within a specified time period. This is to ensure that the second opinion appointed doctor's assessment is undertaken within a safe time period, such that the patient is not put at undue risk. Regulations under this section may make provision to specific exceptions, such as applying section 62ZA to certain types of treatment under section 58A but not others, and for different cases, such as where the patient lacks the capacity or competence to consent to the treatment. This is because, while currently section 58A applies to electro-convulsive therapy only, if existing regulations are used to insert other treatments under this section, then such treatments may not necessitate the same second opinion appointed doctor certification process as for electro-convulsive therapy. Similarly, it may make sense to only provide for second opinion appointed doctor certification within specific timeframes in particular circumstances.

18
Urgent electro-convulsive therapy etc
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 58A (electro-convulsive therapy etc), in subsection (2), for “section
15
 
62” substitute “section 62ZA”.
 
 
(3)
In section 62 (urgent treatment) omit subsections (1A) to (1C).
 
 
(4)
After section 62 insert—
 
“62ZA
Urgent treatment: electro-convulsive therapy, etc.
 
 
(1)
This section applies instead of section 58A—
20
 
(a)
to any treatment with electro-convulsive therapy where—
 
 
(i)
the treatment is immediately necessary to save the
 
 
patient’s life, or
 
 
(ii)
the treatment is not irreversible and is immediately
 
 
necessary to prevent a serious deterioration of the
25
 
patient’s condition;
 
 
(b)
to any treatment of a form specified under section 58A(1)(b),
 
 
where the treatment falls within such of paragraphs (a) to (d)
 
 
of section 62(1) as may be specified in regulations under section
 
 
58A(1)(b).
30
 
(2)
The treatment may be given to a patient who has capacity to consent
 
 
to the treatment only if—
 
 
(a)
the patient has consented to it, or
 
 
(b)
the patient has not consented but a certificate has been given
 
 
by a second opinion appointed doctor under subsection (4) .
35
 
(3)
The treatment may be given to a patient who lacks capacity to consent
 
 
to the treatment only if—
 
 
(a)
the giving of the treatment would not conflict with any of the
 
 
following—
 
 
(i)
a valid and applicable advance decision, or
40

Page 26

 
(ii)
a decision of a donee or deputy or the Court of
 
 
Protection, or
 
 
(b)
the giving of the treatment would conflict with such a decision
 
 
but a certificate has been given by a second opinion appointed
 
 
doctor under subsection (5) .
5
 
(4)
A certificate under this subsection is a certificate stating—
 
 
(a)
that the patient has capacity to consent to the treatment but
 
 
has not consented to it,
 
 
(b)
that the decision to give the treatment was made by the
 
 
approved clinician in charge of the treatment in accordance
10
 
with section 56A ,
 
 
(c)
where the treatment is electro-convulsive therapy, that the
 
 
treatment—
 
 
(i)
is immediately necessary to save the patient’s life, or
 
 
(ii)
is not irreversible and is immediately necessary to
15
 
prevent a serious deterioration of the patient’s condition,
 
 
and
 
 
(d)
where the treatment is of a form specified under section
 
 
58A(1)(b), which of the paragraphs of section 62(1) it falls
 
 
within (see subsection (1) (b) ).
20
 
(5)
A certificate under this subsection is a certificate stating —
 
 
(a)
that the patient lacks capacity to consent to the treatment and
 
 
it appears to the second opinion appointed doctor that there
 
 
is a decision mentioned in subsection (3) (a) or (b) which, if
 
 
valid, would conflict with the giving of the treatment,
25
 
(b)
that the decision to give the treatment was made by the
 
 
approved clinician in charge of the treatment in accordance
 
 
with section 56A ,
 
 
(c)
where the treatment is electro-convulsive therapy, that the
 
 
treatment—
30
 
(i)
is immediately necessary to save the patient’s life, or
 
 
(ii)
is not irreversible and is immediately necessary to
 
 
prevent a serious deterioration of the patient’s condition,
 
 
and
 
 
(d)
where the treatment is of a form specified under section
35
 
58A(1)(b), which of the paragraphs of section 62(1) it falls
 
 
within (see subsection (1) (b) ).
 
 
(6)
Before giving a certificate under this section, the second opinion
 
 
appointed doctor must, if it is practicable to do so within any period
 
 
specified under section 62ZC (1) , consult—
40
 
(a)
a nurse who has been professionally concerned with the
 
 
patient's medical treatment and is neither the responsible
 
 
clinician nor the approved clinician in charge of the treatment
 
 
in question, and
 
 
(b)
the patient’s nominated person.
45

Page 27

 
(7)
Any request under section 56B for the appointment of a second opinion
 
 
doctor in relation to the function of giving a certificate under this
 
 
section must be made by the relevant person (within the meaning of
 
 
section 56B ) as soon as reasonably practicable.
 
 
(8)
The regulatory authority must, on receiving such a request, make the
5
 
appointment under section 56B as soon as practicable.
 
 
(9)
Subsection (3) of section 62 applies for the purposes of this section as
 
 
it applies for the purposes of that section.
 
 
62ZB
Life-saving section 62ZA treatment: modified procedure in exceptional
 
 
circumstances
10
 
(1)
Where—
 
 
(a)
a request is made to the regulatory authority under section
 
 
56B for the appointment of a second opinion doctor to perform
 
 
the function of giving a certificate under section 62ZA in
 
 
relation to any treatment, and
15
 
(b)
the regulatory authority determines that there are exceptional
 
 
circumstances which mean that there will be a delay in
 
 
appointing a second opinion doctor,
 
 
a function of a second opinion appointed doctor under section 62ZA
 
 
in relation to the giving of a certificate containing a statement under
20
 
subsection (4) (c) (i) or (5) (c) (i) of that section may be performed, instead,
 
 
by the approved clinician in charge of that treatment.
 
 
(2)
But no treatment may be given in reliance on a certificate given by
 
 
the approved clinician by virtue of subsection (1) once the second
 
 
opinion doctor has been appointed under section 56B .
25
 
(3)
Each time a patient is given treatment in reliance on a certificate given
 
 
by the approved clinician by virtue of subsection (1) , the managers of
 
 
the hospital or registered establishment in which the treatment is given
 
 
must notify the regulatory authority of that treatment as soon as
 
 
reasonably practicable.
30
 
(4)
The regulatory authority’s annual report under section 120D must
 
 
include—
 
 
(a)
a statement of how many times the regulatory authority has
 
 
made a determination under subsection (1) (b) in the period to
 
 
which the report relates and a summary of the reasons why
35
 
any determinations have been made, and
 
 
(b)
a statement of how many times during that period treatment
 
 
has been given in reliance on a certificate issued by virtue of
 
 
subsection (1) .
 
62ZC
Section
40
 
(1)
The appropriate national authority may by regulations impose duties
 
 
on—
 

Page 28

 
(a)
the managers of hospitals or registered establishments,
 
 
(b)
approved clinicians, or
 
 
(c)
the regulatory authority,
 
 
for the purpose of ensuring that a certificate given under section 62ZA
 
 
is given within a period specified in the regulations.
5
 
(2)
Regulations under this section may make—
 
 
(a)
provision subject to specified exceptions;
 
 
(b)
different provision for different cases;
 
 
(c)
transitional, consequential, incidental or supplemental
 
 
provision.”
10
 
(5)
In section 64 (supplementary provisions for Part 4), in subsection (1) (as
 
 
substituted by section 10 of this Act), at the appropriate place insert—
 
 
““the appropriate national authority” has the meaning given by section
 
 
58A(10);”.
 
 
(6)
In section 118 (code of practice), in subsection (1), after paragraph (d) (as
15
 
inserted by Schedule 3 to this Act) insert—
 
 
“(e)
for the guidance of the regulatory authority in relation to its
 
 
functions under or by virtue of Part 4; and”.
 
"Remote assessment for treatment"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

131. Under the Act and the Bill, second opinion appointed doctors, or other people appointed by the regulator, are responsible for conducting interviews or examinations for the purpose of carrying out second opinion functions in relation to a person's treatment. This clause makes clear that interview and examination is permitted to take place remotely by live video or audio-link in relation to these functions, where this is considered appropriate. Where this is not the case, in-person interview or examination should take place. The intention of this 'hybrid' approach is to improve the effectiveness of the second opinion service under the Act.

19
Remote assessment for treatment
 
 
(1)
Section 119 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (practitioners approved for Part 4
20
 
and section 118) is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In subsection (2)(a), for the first “and” substitute “or”.
 
 
(3)
After subsection (2) insert—
 
 
“(2A)
A person authorised by subsection (2) to carry out an interview or
 
 
examination may, to the extent that they consider appropriate, carry
25
 
it out—
 
 
(a)
by live audio link, or
 
 
(b)
by live video link.”
 
 
(4)
In subsection (3), before the definition of “regulated establishment” insert—
 
 
““live audio link” , in relation to the carrying out of an interview or
30
 
examination, means a live telephone link or other arrangement which
 
 
enables the patient and the person carrying out the interview or
 
 
examination to hear one another;
 
 
“live video link” , in relation to the carrying out of an interview or
 
 
examination, means a live television link or other arrangement which
35
 
enables the patient and the person carrying out the interview or
 
 
examination to see and hear one another;”.
 
"Capacity to consent to treatment"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

132. Under the current Act, the patient's mental capacity or competence to consent to or refuse treatment is expressed by reference to whether the patient is "capable of understanding the nature, purpose and likely effects" of that treatment. In clinical practice, this is understood to refer to capacity or competence. This position is confirmed in the Code of Practice. Clause 20 amends this wording to references to 'capacity or competence to consent'. While this amendment is not expected to create a practical change in clinical approaches to assessing capacity or competence, this change provides clarity by confirming the shared legal concepts between the Act and the Mental Capacity Act 2005 Act (the 2005 Act). It also brings Part 4 in line with Part 4A of the Act, which already adopts this terminology.

133. Subsection (6) provides that references in the Bill to “capacity" are applicable to patients who are aged 16 or older, references to “competence" are applicable to patients under the age of 16.

134. Subsection (6) also clarifies that references to an advance decision made by a patient are within the meaning of the 2005 Act. References to "valid and applicable", in relation to an advance decision, means valid and applicable to the treatment in question in accordance with section 25 of the 2005 Act. References to a “donee" are to a donee of a lasting power of attorney created by the patient, within the meaning of section 9 of the 2005 Act, where the donee is acting within the scope of their authority and in accordance with that Act. References to a “deputy” are to a deputy appointed for the patient by the Court of Protection under section 16 of the 2005 Act, where the deputy is acting within the scope of their authority and in accordance with that Act. By cross referencing the 2005 Act, the Bill gives recognition to pre-existing and well-established concepts that seek to provide people with the power to inform their future care and treatment, in case at a later date they are too unwell and lack the capacity to make treatment decisions.

20
Capacity to consent to treatment
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 

Page 29

 
(2)
In section 57 (treatment requiring consent and a second opinion), in subsection
 
 
(2)(a), for “is capable of understanding the nature, purpose and likely effects
 
 
of” substitute “has capacity to consent to”.
 
 
(3)
In section 58 (treatment requiring consent or a second opinion), in subsection
 
 
(3)—
5
 
(a)
in paragraph (a), for “is capable of understanding its nature, purpose
 
 
and likely effects” substitute “has capacity to consent to it”;
 
 
(b)
in paragraph (b), for “is not capable of understanding the nature,
 
 
purpose and likely effects of” substitute “lacks capacity to consent to”.
 
 
(4)
In section 58A (electro-convulsive therapy etc)—
10
 
(a)
in subsection (3)(c), for “is capable of understanding the nature,
 
 
purpose and likely effects of” substitute “has capacity to consent to”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (4)(c), for sub-paragraph (i) (but not the “and” at the
 
 
end) substitute—
 
 
“(i)
that the patient has capacity to consent to the
15
 
treatment and has consented to it,”;
 
 
(c)
in subsection (7), for the words from “is not” to the end substitute
 
 
“lacks capacity to consent to the treatment”;
 
 
(d)
omit subsection (9).
 
 
(5)
In section 60 (withdrawal of consent)—
20
 
(a)
in subsection (1A)(b), for the words from “be” to the end substitute
 
 
“have capacity to consent to the treatment”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (1C)—
 
 
(i)
in paragraph (a), for the words from “is not” to “effects of”
 
 
substitute “lacks capacity to consent to”;
25
 
(ii)
in paragraph (b), for the words from “becomes” to the end
 
 
substitute “gains capacity to consent to that treatment”.
 
 
(6)
In section 64 (supplementary provisions for Part 4), after subsection (1B)
 
 
insert—
 
 
“(1BA)
In relation to a patient who is aged under 16, references in this Part
30
 
to capacity are to be read as references to competence.
 
 
(1BB)
In relation to a patient who is aged 16 or over—
 
 
(a)
references in this Part to lacking capacity are to lacking capacity
 
 
within the meaning of the Mental Capacity Act 2005, and
 
 
(b)
references in this Part to having, ceasing to have or gaining
35
 
capacity are to be read accordingly.
 
 
(1BC)
References in this Part—
 
 
(a)
to an advance decision are to an advance decision (within the
 
 
meaning of the Mental Capacity Act 2005) made by the patient;
 
 
(b)
to a donee are to a donee of a lasting power of attorney (within
40
 
the meaning of section 9 of the Mental Capacity Act 2005)
 
 
created by the patient, where the donee is acting within the
 
 
scope of their authority and in accordance with that Act;
 

Page 30

 
(c)
to a deputy are to a deputy appointed for the patient by the
 
 
Court of Protection under section 16 of the Mental Capacity
 
 
Act 2005, where the deputy is acting within the scope of their
 
 
authority and in accordance with that Act.
 
 
(1BD)
In this Part “valid and applicable”, in relation to an advance decision,
5
 
means valid and applicable to the treatment in question in accordance
 
 
with section 25 of the Mental Capacity Act 2005.”
 
"Care and treatment plans"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

135. The Bill will introduce statutory care and treatment plans with respect to all patients formally detained under the Act, excluding those under short term sections (e.g. section 5(2) which allows detention for 72 hours only). This applies to England only, as there is similar provision already in place in Wales. The main purpose of the new statutory plan is to ensure that all relevant patients have a clear and personalised strategy in place describing what is needed to progress them towards recovery and their timely discharge from the Act.

136. Subsection (1) requires that the appropriate practitioner, as defined in section 34, prepares a care and treatment plan, in respect of all eligible patients. Subsection (2) identifies the groups of patients to which the requirement to prepare a care and treatment plan applies, including: those liable to be detained in England excluding under certain provisions, patients who are subject to guardianship where the relevant local authority is England, and patients being under a CTO, with a responsible hospital in England. This excludes patients detained under “short-term" sections (sections 4, 5 subsection (2) or (4),) detention in a place of safety under emergency powers in sections 135 or 136 of the Act, or where there is a direction for Part 3 patients under section 35 subsection (4), 36 subsection (3), 37 subsection (4), 38 subsection (4) or 45A subsection (5), as these patients are not detained long enough to obtain a benefit from a plan.

137. Subsection (3) defines the care and treatment plan as a document containing a plan for meeting the patient's needs, arising from or related to their mental disorder, made in accordance with regulations made by the Secretary of State. The scope of the plan is to include meeting the patient's needs in relation to their care, treatment, leave, and eventual discharge, as well as wider relevant issues such as those relating to the patient's life in the community, for example, their employment and accommodation where this helps meet their needs that arise from or relate to their mental disorder. In addition, the plan may also contain other information, for example, how the patient's communication needs will be met). By setting out what these plans are to contain, the aim is to create a consistent framework that clinicians must follow when preparing a care and treatment plan, thereby helping to ensure that patient's plans are sufficiently comprehensive, while also making them comparable, so they can be more easily quality assured.

138. The plan is also intended to provide evidence about important clinical decisions, such as the reasons behind the individual's detention, as well as evidence of how the patient and those close to them have been included in care and treatment decisions. This is to ensure greater transparency and scrutiny around clinical decision making, such that detention and the use of restrictive practice (e.g. compulsory treatment and seclusion) is only used when there is a robust justification. The Independent Review of the Mental Health Act described the new statutory care and treatment plan as the 'cornerstone' of the reforms, delivering on all four of the guiding principles: choice and autonomy; least restriction; therapeutic benefit; and the person as an individual.

139. Pursuant to subsection (4), the regulations may include 'information' about those with whom the patient has a relationship, or other connection, or those to whom the plan is relevant, if this information is for purposes related to meeting the patient's needs, or for the purposes of reviewing or revising the plan or is information contained in a report produced under new section 125A or 125B (as introduced by clause 4). For example, if the patient has a learning disability, the plan could include how adjustments will be made to communicate information to the patient appropriately e.g. details of someone who will do this, or information relating to the family members the patient wishes to be involved in their care and any updates to their plan (see subsection 4). For patients detained under Part 3 of the Act, this may also include other information related to the victim(s) of the crime the patient has been accused or convicted of, and any criminal justice involvement such as Multi Agency Public Protection Arrangements to protect members of the public.

140. Subsection (5) introduces requirements around when the plan should be reviewed, such as if the appropriate practitioner is notified that the patient's case is to be considered at a Tribunal hearing, following a care education and treatment review meeting (relevant for patients with a learning disability or autistic patients – see clause 4, or when certain people, including the patient or their Nominated Person - see clause 23, make a reasonable request). By setting out clear trigger points, the aim is that the appropriate practitioner keeps the plan up to date and ensures that it reflects the circumstances of the patient's case.

141. Subsection (6) requires that when the practitioner prepares or reviews the plan that, where practicable and appropriate, they do so in consultation with the patient, and others, such as family members engaged in the welfare of the individual, the patient's nominated person, and their independent mental health advocate. The intention is that the plan is prepared in direct collaboration with the patient, or where they are not well enough to engage, those close to them, so that the plan is built around the patient's wishes, preferences, and individual needs, as far as possible, thereby reflecting the principle of choice and autonomy.

142. Subsection (7) gives the Secretary of State the power to make regulations regarding the circumstances under which a patient's plan should be revised and specifying where a plan is to be prepared, reviewed or revised, when that is to be done.

143. Subsection (8) gives the Secretary of State the power to make regulations regarding the disclosure of information contained in the patient's plan, or information held for the purposes of meeting the requirements associated with the plan. For example, this might include the sharing of information regarding the patient or those who the patient wishes to be involved and consulted on their care, between inpatient and community services, to help facilitate the safe and effective discharge of the patient.

144. Subsection (9) specifies that the provisions made in regulations under section 130ZA may be specific to certain groups of patients, or different cases, or transitional, consequential, incidental or supplemental provision. For example, provisions may be made specifically in relation to restricted patients, who are subject to controls by the Secretary of State for Justice, which do not apply to civil patients.

145. The clause inserts new section 130ZB, which sets out how patients' plans will be monitored, to ensure that everyone has a care and treatment plan and that these are made in accordance with the legislation to help ensure they are sufficiently comprehensive and up to date. Subsections (1) and (2) impose requirements on the managers of a hospital (within the meaning of section 145) or a registered establishment in England, or a local social services authority, whichever is relevant, to make arrangements to ensure that plans are prepared in accordance with the relevant duties imposed by section 130ZA. If the responsible authority considers that a patient's plan should be reviewed, they should also make arrangements for the appropriate practitioner in charge of the plan to be requested to review it (subsection (3)).

21
Care and treatment plans
 
 
In the Mental Health Act 1983, in Part 10, before section 130A insert—
 
“130ZA
Care and treatment plans for patients in England
10
 
(1)
The appropriate practitioner must prepare a care and treatment plan
 
 
for a patient to whom this section applies.
 
 
(2)
This section applies to a patient who—
 
 
(a)
is liable to be detained under this Act in a hospital or registered
 
 
establishment in England otherwise than—
15
 
(i)
by virtue of an emergency application where the second
 
 
medical recommendation referred to in section 4(4)(a)
 
 
has not been given and received, or
 
 
(ii)
by virtue of section 5(2) or (4), 135 or 136 or directions
 
 
for detention in a place of safety under section 35(4),
20
 
36(3), 37(4), 38(4) or 45A(5),
 
 
(b)
is subject to guardianship under this Act, if the area of the
 
 
responsible local social services authority is in England, or
 
 
(c)
is a community patient, if the responsible hospital is in England.
 
 
(3)
A “care and treatment plan” is a document—
25
 
(a)
containing a plan, made in accordance with regulations made
 
 
by the Secretary of State, for meeting the patient’s needs arising
 
 
from or related to mental disorder, and
 
 
(b)
containing, or to which is attached, any other information
 
 
authorised or required by the regulations.
30
 
(4)
The information authorised or required to be included in, or attached
 
 
to, a care and treatment plan by virtue of regulations under subsection
 
 
(3) may include—
 
 
(a)
information about people with whom a patient has a
 
 
relationship or other connection, or to whom a care and
35
 
treatment plan is relevant, for purposes related to—
 
 
(i)
the meeting of the patient’s needs mentioned in
 
 
subsection (3) (a) , or
 
 
(ii)
the review or revision of the care and treatment plan;
 
 
(b)
any information contained in a report prepared in accordance
40
 
with section 125A or 125B .
 
 
(5)
The appropriate practitioner must review a care and treatment plan—
 

Page 31

 
(a)
following any meeting relating to the patient under section
 
 
125A or 125B ;
 
 
(b)
following any change in the relevant patient’s condition or
 
 
circumstances which the appropriate practitioner considers
 
 
significant;
5
 
(c)
if the appropriate practitioner is considering whether the
 
 
relevant patient should—
 
 
(i)
become liable to be detained by virtue of a different
 
 
provision of this Act,
 
 
(ii)
become subject to guardianship under this Act,
10
 
(iii)
become a community patient, or
 
 
(iv)
be discharged under section 23;
 
 
(d)
if the appropriate practitioner is notified that the patient’s case
 
 
is to be considered by a tribunal under this Act;
 
 
(e)
if requested to do so by virtue of section 130ZB (3) ;
15
 
(f)
if reasonably requested to do so by—
 
 
(i)
the relevant patient;
 
 
(ii)
anyone named by the relevant patient as someone to
 
 
be consulted about their care and treatment plan;
 
 
(iii)
the relevant patient’s nominated person;
20
 
(iv)
any independent mental health advocate from whom
 
 
the relevant patient is receiving help by virtue of section
 
 
130A;
 
 
(v)
any donee or deputy for the relevant patient;
 
 
(vi)
any other person who cares for the relevant patient or
25
 
is interested in the relevant patient’s welfare.
 
 
(6)
When preparing or reviewing a care and treatment plan, the
 
 
appropriate practitioner must, if it is practicable and appropriate to
 
 
do so, consult the persons mentioned in subsection (5) (f) .
 
 
(7)
The Secretary of State may by regulations make provision—
30
 
(a)
requiring a care and treatment plan to be revised in specified
 
 
circumstances;
 
 
(b)
specifying, in relation to cases in which a care and treatment
 
 
plan must be prepared, reviewed or revised, when that must
 
 
be done.
35
 
(8)
The Secretary of State may by regulations make provision about—
 
 
(a)
disclosure of information contained in a care and treatment
 
 
plan;
 
 
(b)
disclosure of other information for the purposes of functions
 
 
under this section.
40
 
(9)
Regulations under this section may make—
 
 
(a)
provision subject to specified exceptions;
 
 
(b)
different provision for different cases;
 
 
(c)
transitional, consequential, incidental or supplemental provision.
 

Page 32

 
(10)
References in this section—
 
 
(a)
to a donee for a patient are to a donee of a lasting power of
 
 
attorney (within the meaning of section 9 of the Mental
 
 
Capacity Act 2005) created by the patient;
 
 
(b)
to a deputy for a patient are to a deputy appointed for the
5
 
patient by the Court of Protection under section 16 of the
 
 
Mental Capacity Act 2005;
 
 
(c)
to the responsible local social services authority—
 
 
(i)
in relation to a patient who is subject to guardianship
 
 
in pursuance of a guardianship application, are to be
10
 
read in accordance with section 34(3);
 
 
(ii)
in relation to a patient who is subject to guardianship
 
 
in pursuance of a guardianship order under section 37,
 
 
are to the local social services authority specified in the
 
 
order.
15
 
(11)
In this section “the appropriate practitioner” has the same meaning
 
 
as in Part 2 (see section 34(1)).
 
130ZB
Care and treatment plans: monitoring
 
 
(1)
The managers of a hospital or registered establishment in England
 
 
must make arrangements for the monitoring of compliance with the
20
 
duties imposed by section 130ZA in relation to relevant patients for
 
 
whom the managers are responsible.
 
 
(2)
A local social services authority whose area is in England must make
 
 
arrangements for the monitoring of compliance with the duties imposed
 
 
by section 130ZA in relation to relevant patients for whom the
25
 
authority is the responsible local social services authority.
 
 
(3)
Arrangements under subsection (1) or (2) must include arrangements
 
 
for the appropriate practitioner, in relation to a relevant patient, to be
 
 
requested to review the patient’s care and treatment plan where the
 
 
managers or local social services authority (as the case may be) consider
30
 
that the care and treatment plan should be reviewed.
 
 
(4)
For the purposes of subsection (1) the managers of a hospital or
 
 
registered establishment are “responsible” for a relevant patient if the
 
 
patient—
 
 
(a)
is liable to be detained under this Act in the hospital or
35
 
registered establishment, or
 
 
(b)
is a community patient for whom the hospital or registered
 
 
establishment is the responsible hospital.
 
 
(5)
The reference in subsection (2) to the responsible local social services
 
 
authority is to be read in accordance with section 130ZA (10) (c) .
40
 
(6)
In this section—
 
 
“the appropriate practitioner” has the same meaning as in Part 2
 
 
(see section 34(1));
 

Page 33

 
“care and treatment plan” has the meaning given by section
 
 
130ZA (3) ;
 
 
“relevant patient” means a patient to whom section 130ZA
 
 
applies.”
 

Community treatment orders

5
"Consultation of the community clinician"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

146. Clause 22 amends section 17A of the Act to require the community clinician responsible for overseeing the patient's care as a community patient, to be involved in decisions regarding the use and operation of CTOs. This covers the decision to make a person subject to a CTO, to vary or suspend conditions made under a CTO, to recall to hospital a patient subject to a CTO, and to revoke a CTO after a patient has been so recalled.

147. In introducing a further professional opinion and check on whether people really need the support of a CTO and in requiring more evidence that a person otherwise presents a risk, or needs the CTO to support a benefit to their mental health, the principle of least restriction and therapeutic benefit is supported.

148. The clause makes a new distinction between a patient's responsible clinician with overall responsibility for them including in hospital, and a community clinician, with the responsibility for the patient in the community, and the clause imposes specific duties on the latter, where the community clinician is not the responsible clinician. Clause 22 subsection 7 amends section 34(1) (interpretation of Part 2) of the Act in order to provide a definition of the community clinician as the approved clinician (as defined in section 145 subsection (1) of the Act overseeing the patient's care as a community patient, or who would oversee the patient's care if they were to become a community patient.

149. Subsection (2) amends section 17A(4) of the Act, to require that, where the responsible clinician is not the clinician who will have care for the patient in the community after discharge, then that community clinician must also agree in writing that the CTO criteria are met. This achieves two aims – continuity of care of the patient from the hospital into the community and additional professional oversight.

150. Subsection (3)(a) amends section 17B(2) of the Act so that a CTO may only specify conditions with the agreement of the community clinician, in addition to the AMHP, as is currently required under section 17B(2).

151. Subsection (3)(b) inserts new subsection 17B(5A), which adds a new requirement that a patient's responsible clinician must consult a community clinician who has been involved with the patient's medical treatment in the community, unless the responsible clinician has so been involved, before varying or suspending conditions made as part of a CTO, unless consultation would involve unreasonable delay. The intention is that the opinion of a community clinician is considered in these circumstances by the hospital responsible clinician.

152. Subsection (4) inserts new subsection 17E(2A) in relation to recalls to require that where the responsible clinician is not the community clinician, before a responsible clinician recalls a patient under a CTO to hospital to provide medical treatment for medical disorder or to manage a risk of harm to the patient or others, they must first consult the community clinician unless consultation would involve unreasonable delay.

153. Subsection (5) inserts new subsection 17F(4A) to require that, after a patient has been recalled to hospital, and before a responsible clinician revokes the CTO to place the patient back on a hospital section, they must first consult the community clinician unless consultation would involve unreasonable delay.

154. Subsection (6) makes amendments to section 20A to require that, when extending a patient's CTO period, the responsible clinician, if they are not the community clinician, must secure a statement in writing from the community clinician that they are satisfied that the CTO criteria in section 20(A)6 are satisfied.

155. Subsections (8) and (9) amend section 80C (removal of patients subject to compulsion in the community from Scotland) and section 85ZA (responsibility for community patients transferred from Channel Islands or Isle of Man). Currently, these sections state that as soon as practicable after the patient's arrival at the place where they are to reside in England or Wales, the responsible clinician shall specify the conditions to which they are to be subject to the CTO. Subsections (8), (9) and (10) add that that these conditions must be that which the AMHP, as currently, and community clinician have agreed should be specified.

22
Consultation of the community clinician
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 17A (4) (grounds for making community treatment orders)—
 
 
(a)
omit the “and” at the end of paragraph (a) ;
 
 
(b)
for paragraph (b) substitute—
10
 
“(b)
an approved mental health professional states in
 
 
writing—
 
 
(i)
that they agree that the relevant criteria are met;
 
 
and
 
 
(ii)
that it is appropriate to make the order; and
15
 
(c)
where the responsible clinician is not the community
 
 
clinician, the community clinician states in writing that
 
 
they agree that the relevant criteria are met.”
 
 
(3)
In section 17B (conditions of community treatment orders)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (2) , for the words from “approved” to “above” substitute
20
 
“relevant professionals”;
 
 
(b)
after subsection (5) insert—
 
 
“(5A)
Where the responsible clinician is not the community clinician,
 
 
the responsible clinician must consult the community clinician
 
 
before varying or suspending conditions specified in a
25
 
community treatment order, unless consultation would involve
 
 
unreasonable delay.”;
 
 
(c)
after subsection (7) insert—
 
 
“(8)
In this section “the relevant professionals” means—
 
 
(a)
the approved mental health professional making the
30
 
statement required by section 17A(4)(b), and
 
 
(b)
where section 17A(4)(c) applies, the community
 
 
clinician.”
 
 
(4)
In section 17E (power to recall a community patient to hospital), after
 
 
subsection (2) insert—
35
 
“(2A)
Where the responsible clinician is not the community clinician, the
 
 
responsible clinician must consult the community clinician before
 
 
recalling a community patient to hospital, unless consultation would
 
 
involve unreasonable delay.”
 

Page 34

 
(5)
In section 17F (powers in respect of recalled patients), after subsection (4)
 
 
insert—
 
 
“(4A)
Where the responsible clinician is not the community clinician, the
 
 
responsible clinician must consult the community clinician before
 
 
revoking a community treatment order, unless consultation would
5
 
involve unreasonable delay.”
 
 
(6)
In section 20A (community treatment period)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (4) (b) , for “under subsection (8) below is made,” substitute
 
 
“has been made—
 
 
“(i)
under subsection (8), and
10
 
(ii)
where the responsible clinician is not the
 
 
community clinician, under subsection (8A),”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (8) , after “(4)” insert “(b)(i)”;
 
 
(c)
after subsection (8) insert—
 
 
“(8A)
The statement referred to in subsection (4)(b)(ii) is a statement
15
 
in writing by the community clinician that it appears to the
 
 
community clinician that the conditions set out in subsection
 
 
(6) are satisfied.”;
 
 
(d)
omit subsection (9) .
 
 
(7)
In section 34 (1) (interpretation of Part 2), at the appropriate place insert—
20
 
““the community clinician” means—
 
 
(a)
in relation to a patient who is liable to be detained in a hospital
 
 
in pursuance of an application for admission for treatment, the
 
 
approved clinician who would oversee the patient’s care if
 
 
they were to become a community patient;
25
 
(b)
in relation to a community patient, the approved clinician
 
 
overseeing the patient’s care as a community patient;”.
 
 
(8)
In section 80C (removal of patients subject to compulsion in the community
 
 
from Scotland)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (6) , for “an approved mental health professional agrees”
30
 
substitute “the relevant professionals agree”;
 
 
(b)
after subsection (6) insert—
 
 
“(7)
In this section “the relevant professionals” means—
 
 
(a)
an approved mental health professional, and
 
 
(b)
where the responsible clinician is not the community
35
 
clinician, the community clinician.”
 
 
(9)
In section 85ZA (responsibility for community patients transferred from
 
 
Channel Islands or Isle of Man)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (5) , for “an approved mental health professional agrees”
 
 
substitute “the relevant professionals agree”;
40
 
(b)
after subsection (5) insert—
 
 
“(6)
In this section “the relevant professionals” means—
 

Page 35

 
(a)
an approved mental health professional, and
 
 
(b)
where the responsible clinician is not the community
 
 
clinician, the community clinician.”
 
 
(10)
In section 92 (interpretation of Part 6), after subsection (1A) insert—
 
 
“(1B)
References in this Part to the community clinician are to be construed
5
 
as references to the community clinician within the meaning of Part
 
 
2.”
 
"Conditions of community treatment orders"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

156. The responsible clinician can add, vary or suspend conditions to a person's CTO to require that the person should fulfil particular criteria. This may include, for example, living in a certain place, attending appointments with mental health professionals, or not taking drugs and drinking alcohol. Recall to hospital should not solely be based on whether a person follows these conditions; rather it should be dependent on whether, in the opinion of the responsible clinician, the patient requires medical treatment in hospital for his mental disorder and there would be a risk of serious harm to the health or safety of the patient or to other persons if the patient were not recalled to hospital for that purpose. However, people on a CTO are often unaware of this and the conditions given to a CTO can therefore be seen as coercive or overly restrictive as not following them can be wrongly understood to be grounds for recall to hospital.

157. Clause 23 makes two amendments in relation to the conditions that a person subject to a CTO may be required to follow.

158. Subsection (1) deletes the words "or appropriate" from the phrase "necessary or appropriate" in section 17B(2), to provide that conditions can only be imposed when they are necessary to serve one or more of the purposes specified.

159. Subsection (2) inserts section 72(3B), which provides a new power for the Tribunal to recommend that the responsible clinician reconsiders whether a particular CTO condition is necessary, in cases where the Tribunal has decided not to discharge a patient from a CTO under section 72(1) of the Act.

23
Conditions of community treatment orders
 
 
(1)
In section 17B(2) of the Mental Health Act 1983 (conditions of community
 
 
treatment orders) omit “or appropriate”.
10
 
(2)
In section 72 of that Act (powers of tribunals), after subsection (3A) insert—
 
 
“(3B)
Where a tribunal does not direct the discharge of a community patient,
 
 
the tribunal may recommend that the responsible clinician reconsider
 
 
whether a condition specified in the community treatment order is
 
 
necessary.”
15

Nominated persons

 
"Nominated person"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

160. Clause 24 introduces a new statutory role to the Act- the nominated person – to replace the nearest relative. The Act currently provides for the role of the nearest relative. It sets out a hierarchical list of 'relatives' and includes a number of rules for identifying the nearest relative from this list. The Independent Review highlighted that service users and stakeholders consistently found the current model of family and carer involvement outdated and insufficient. This was found to be particularly true of the current nearest relative provisions.

161. The general intention of this reform is that, in place of the nearest relative, a patient would be able to personally select the nominated person to represent them and exercise the relevant statutory functions which the Bill extends. This supports the policy objective of improving support for detained patients and is linked to the wider policy intention to ensure that the views, experiences and expertise of patients are taken into account more fully and more seriously in their care and treatment, by allowing an individual to express their wishes through someone they know and trust. In doing so, these measures support the principle of choice and autonomy.

162. Following the reforms, a nominated person can be selected by the patient at any time when they have capacity / competence to do so. Typically, it is envisaged that nominations would be made: a. In advance of the detention – this could be done via a document that has been signed by the person, the nominated person and 'validated' by a health or social care professional. This would include for instance when a patient has been admitted to hospital informally. b. At the time of the Act assessment – the AMHP would be required to check if a valid nomination has been made, and if not (assuming that the person has the relevant capacity/competence), they could explain what the nomination process involves and see if the person wanted to make a nomination. c. Following detention – a patient would be able to nominate someone to be their nominated person at any time when they have capacity / competence to do so (by following the same process that applies to a nomination in advance of the detention).

163. If someone lacks the relevant capacity / competence to make a nomination at the point of detention or at any other time, and has not previously nominated anyone, a nominated person can be appointed by an AMHP. This nominated person can be in place until the person has the relevant capacity / competence to make their own nomination and does so.

164. The nearest relative currently has a number of important rights and functions under the Act, including: a. The right to require an assessment to be made with a view to admitting the patient to hospital (section 13(4)). b. The right to apply for compulsory admission or guardianship (sections 2,3,4 and 7). C. The right to be consulted or informed before an AMHP makes an application for detention under section 3 or guardianship (section 11(3)-(4)). d. The right to object to section 3 admission or guardianship (section 11(4)). e. The right to order discharge of the patient (sections 23 and 25). f. The right to information given to the detained patient or patient subject to supervised community treatment (section 132(4)). g. The right to apply to the Tribunal (sections 66 and 68(1).

165. The existing nearest relative powers listed in the paragraph above will be transferred to the nominated person role. In addition, the nominated person would be given the following new powers and rights: a. A right to be consulted about statutory care and treatment plans. b. A right to be consulted about transfers between hospitals, and renewals and extensions to the patient's detention or CTO; and C. The power to object to the use of a CTO.

166. Currently, if the nearest relative exercises one of their powers (e.g., the ability to block admission), but the AMHP believes the grounds for this are unreasonable, the only means of overruling them is to remove or displace them as the nearest relative. This can prevent the nearest relative from continuing in their statutory role in supporting the patient while they are detained, even though they may be best equipped to protect and promote the patient's interests.

167. As the nominated person will have been identified by the patient as someone they wish to be involved in representing them when detained under the Act, the Bill seeks to provide that the nominated person's use of a power can sometimes be temporarily overruled, but that this does not require the nominated person being removed or displaced altogether, to ensure that where appropriate they continue to have a role in the patient's care and treatment while they are detained.

168. The nominated person powers to which overruling would apply are the following: a. The right to object to section 3 admission or guardianship; b. The new right to object to the use of a CTO; and C. The right to order discharge of the patient from detention, CTO, or guardianship.

169. The process in which the use of a nominated person power can be overruled is via section 25 of the Act (i.e. the barring order). Currently, under section 23, the nearest relative can order a patient's discharge from detention or from a CTO (where this follows detention under section 3). The nearest relative must give 72 hours' notice in writing to the hospital.

170. The nearest relative's order may be barred if, within the 72 hours, the patient's responsible clinician provides a written ‘barring' report that they consider that the patient, if so discharged, 'would be likely to act in a manner dangerous to other persons or to himself' (under section 25).

171. The barring report prevents the nearest relative from ordering discharge at any time in the six months following the date of the report. This time period has been amended by the Bill to three months in order to align with the updated detention periods set out in these reforms. This is set out under clause 26.

172. Under section 66, if the patient is detained under section 3 or on a CTO following section 3, then the nearest relative may, within 28 days of the barring report being issued, apply to the Tribunal for the patient's discharge instead.

173. All of the above relating to the barring order will apply for the nominated person.

174. Clause 24 introduces Schedule 2 and describes its contents. The Schedule deals with the appointment of a nominated person and transfers existing functions conferred on the nearest relative. The new functions conferred on a nominated person are provided for by clauses 24 to 28.

175. Schedule 2 inserts section 30A and section 30B into the Act.

176. New section 30A introduces new Schedule A1 into the Act which confers the power to appoint a nominated person for a patient for the purposes of this Act and makes provision about the duration of the appointment.

177. New section 30B 'Power of court to terminate appointment of nominated person' replaces section 29, which sets out the procedure for displacement of a nearest relative. It provides that the county court may make an order terminating the appointment of a nominated person. An order may be made on the application of the patient, an AMHP, or any person engaged in caring for the patient or interested in the patient's welfare.

178. An application for an order under this section may only be made on the grounds that - a. The nominated person unreasonably objects to the making of an application for admission for treatment, or a guardianship application in respect of the patient; b. The nominated person has, without due regard to the welfare of the patient or the interests of the public, exercised the power to discharge the patient under this Part of the Act or is likely to do so; C. The nominated person unreasonably objects to the making of a CTO in respect of the patient; d. The patient has done anything which is clearly inconsistent with the nominated person remaining the patient's nominated person. This is intended to ensure that the person does not become locked-in with a nomination they wouldn't want. For example, where the patient clearly does not like their nominated person but lacks capacity to revoke them, and the criteria for displacement are not met; e. The nominated person lacks the capacity or competence to act as a nominated person; and f. The nominated person is otherwise not a suitable person to act as a nominated person.

179. Where an order under this section terminates the appointment of a nominated person for a patient, the person is disqualified from being re-appointed, for the period specified by the court in the order.

180. Schedule A1 concerns the appointment of a nominated person by a patient. A person (the "patient") may appoint a person to act as their nominated person for the purposes of the Act.

24
Nominated person
 
 
Schedule 2 contains amendments of the Mental Health Act 1983 which—
 
 
(a)
make provision about the appointment of a nominated person for a
 
 
patient,
20
 
(b)
transfer to nominated persons functions currently conferred on patients’
 
 
nearest relatives, and
 
 
(c)
confer functions on nominated persons for certain patients concerned
 
 
in criminal proceedings.
 
"Applications for admission or guardianship: role of nominated person"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

204. Clause 25 subsection (2) inserts references to the nominated person into section 11 so that the AMHP should be required to consult the nominated person before they make an application for admission for treatment or guardianship (unless it is not reasonably practicable, or it would involve unreasonable delay). This also amends section 20, requiring the responsible clinician/appropriate practitioner to consult the nominated person before providing a report for the purposes of renewal of detention or guardianship.

205. The nominated person can object to the making of an application for admission for treatment or the making of a guardianship application by notifying the AMHP or the local social services authority on whose behalf the professional is acting. Where a nominated person objects to the making of an application, the application may be made only if it is accompanied by a report certifying that in the opinion of the AMHP, the patient if not admitted for treatment or received into guardianship, would be likely to act in a manner that is dangerous to other persons or to themselves. The changes in the Bill allow the AMHP to make use of the barring order on this occasion as AMHPs are professionally fit to judge whether the patient would act in a dangerous manner if they were not admitted or received into guardianship.

206. Section 66, which refers to the nearest relative's right to apply to the Tribunal for the patient's discharge, is also being amended to apply to the nominated person and apply where their objection to detention, and guardianship is being overruled.

25
Applications for admission or guardianship: role of nominated person
25
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 11 (general provisions about applications for admission or
 
 
guardianship), for subsection (4) substitute—
 
 
“(4)
Before an approved mental health professional makes an application
 
 
for admission for treatment or a guardianship application in respect
30
 
of a patient who appears to have a nominated person, the professional
 
 
must consult that person.
 
 
(4A)
But the consultation requirement imposed by subsection (4) does not
 
 
apply if it appears to the approved mental health professional that
 
 
consultation—
35
 
(a)
is not reasonably practicable, or
 
 
(b)
would involve unreasonable delay.
 

Page 36

 
(4B)
A patient’s nominated person may object to the making of an
 
 
application for admission for treatment or the making of a
 
 
guardianship application by an approved mental health professional
 
 
by—
 
 
(a)
notifying the professional, or
5
 
(b)
notifying the local social services authority on whose behalf
 
 
the professional is acting.
 
 
(4C)
Where a nominated person objects under subsection (4B) to the making
 
 
of an application, the application may be made only if it is
 
 
accompanied by a report certifying that, in the opinion of the approved
10
 
mental health professional, the patient, if not admitted for treatment
 
 
or received into guardianship, would be likely to act in a manner that
 
 
is dangerous to other persons or to the patient.”
 
 
(3)
In section 20 (duration of authority)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (5)—
15
 
(i)
the words from “one” to the end become paragraph (a), and
 
 
(ii)
after that paragraph insert “; and
 
 
“(b)
if the patient appears to have a nominated
 
 
person, the nominated person.”;
 
 
(b)
after subsection (6) insert—
20
 
“(6A)
Before furnishing a report under subsection (6), the appropriate
 
 
practitioner must, if the patient appears to have a nominated
 
 
person, consult that person.”
 
 
(4)
In section 66 (applications to tribunals), in subsection (1), after sub-paragraph
 
 
(i) insert—
25
 
“(ia)
in the cases mentioned in paragraphs (b) and (c) where
 
 
the application was made despite an objection under
 
 
section 11 (4B) , by the patient’s nominated person;”.
 
"Discharge of patients: role of nominated person"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

207. Clause 26 substitutes the word nominated person for nearest relative in section 25 of the Act (restrictions on discharge by nearest relative). The current time limit of six months (i.e. the nearest relative cannot make another order for the discharge of the patient during six months within the date of the report) is also changed to three months. This is to reflect the changes in detention periods from six months to three months (see clause 29: Detention periods).

26
Discharge of patients: role of nominated person
 
 
In section 25 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (restrictions on discharge by
30
 
nearest relative)—
 
 
(a)
in the heading, for “nearest relative” substitute “nominated person”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (1)—
 
 
(i)
in the words before paragraph (a), for “nearest relative”
 
 
substitute “nominated person”;
35
 
(ii)
in paragraphs (a) and (b), for “relative” substitute “nominated
 
 
person”;
 
 
(iii)
in paragraph (b) for “six months” substitute “three months”;
 
 
(c)
in subsection (2), for “nearest relative” substitute “nominated person”;
 
"Community treatment orders: role of nominated person"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

208. This clause inserts the new section 17AA 'Community treatment orders: role of nominated person'. Before the responsible clinician makes a CTO, they must consult the patient's nominated person (unless it is not reasonably practicable, or it would involve unreasonable delay). Currently, the nearest relative should be informed of the patient being put on a CTO but there is no requirement to consult with them on the decision, meaning that they currently cannot object to this. Under the reforms, a patient's nominated person may object to the making of a CTO by notifying the responsible clinician.

209. Where the nominated person objects to the making of a CTO by notifying the responsible clinician, the CTO may not be made unless the responsible clinician certifies in writing that it is their opinion that the patient should be discharged and if discharged without a CTO being in force, the patient would be likely to act in a manner that is dangerous to other persons or to themselves (i.e. the barring order would apply).

210. Section 66, which refers to the nearest relative's right to apply to the Tribunal, is also amended to cover objections by the nominated person under section 17AA(3) (making a CTO) (subsection(5)).

27
Community treatment orders: role of nominated person
40
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 

Page 37

 
(2)
After section 17A insert—
 
“17AA
Community treatment orders: role of nominated person
 
 
(1)
Before the responsible clinician makes a community treatment order
 
 
in respect of a patient who appears to have a nominated person, the
 
 
responsible clinician must consult that person.
5
 
(2)
But the consultation requirement imposed by subsection (1) does not
 
 
apply if it appears to the responsible clinician that consultation—
 
 
(a)
is not reasonably practicable, or
 
 
(b)
would involve unreasonable delay.
 
 
(3)
A patient’s nominated person may object to the making of a
10
 
community treatment order by notifying the responsible clinician.
 
 
(4)
Where the nominated person objects under subsection (3) , the
 
 
community treatment order may not be made unless the responsible
 
 
clinician certifies in writing that—
 
 
(a)
in the opinion of the responsible clinician, the patient should
15
 
be discharged from hospital, and
 
 
(b)
the patient, if so discharged without a community treatment
 
 
order being in force, would be likely to act in a manner that
 
 
is dangerous to other persons or to the patient.”
 
 
(3)
In the heading to section 17B, after “Conditions” insert “to be included in
20
 
community treatment orders”.
 
 
(4)
In section 20A (community treatment period and extensions), after subsection
 
 
(8A) (as inserted by section 22 of this Act) insert—
 
 
“(8B)
Before making a statement under subsection (8)(b) in respect of a
 
 
patient who appears to have a nominated person, the approved mental
25
 
health professional must consult the nominated person, unless
 
 
consultation—
 
 
(a)
is not reasonably practicable, or
 
 
(b)
would involve unreasonable delay.”
 
 
(5)
In section 66 (applications to tribunals), in subsection (1), after sub-paragraph
30
 
(ia) (inserted by section 27 of this Act) insert—
 
 
“(ib)
in the case mentioned in paragraph (ca) where the
 
 
application was made despite an objection under section
 
 
17AA (3) , by the patient’s nominated person;”.
 
 
(6)
In Part 1 of Schedule 1 (application of certain provisions to patients subject
35
 
to hospital and guardianship orders: patients not subject to special restrictions),
 
 
in paragraph 1, before “17B,” (as inserted by Schedule 1 to this Act) insert
 
 
“17AA,”.
 

Page 38

"Transfer of patients: role of nominated person"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

211. Currently the nearest relative should be informed if the patient needs to be transferred from one hospital to another but there is no requirement to consult with the nearest relative on the decision, meaning that the nearest relative currently cannot object to this. Clause 28 establishes a new right for nominated persons to be consulted about transfers between hospitals. It amends section 19 so that before deciding to transfer a patient between hospitals, the person responsible for taking that decision must consult the patient's nominated person, unless consultation is not reasonably practicable or would involve unreasonable delay.

28
Transfer of patients: role of nominated person
 
 
In section 19 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (transfer of patients), after
 
 
subsection (3) insert—
 
 
“(3A)
Before deciding to transfer a patient between hospitals in pursuance
 
 
of regulations under subsection (1), or in pursuance of subsection (3),
5
 
the person responsible for taking that decision must consult the
 
 
patient’s nominated person (if any), unless consultation—
 
 
(a)
is not reasonably practicable, or
 
 
(b)
would involve unreasonable delay.”
 

Detention periods

10
"Detention periods"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

212. Clause 29 shortens the period that a patient admitted to hospital may be kept in detention for treatment. This change will mean that a patient's initial detention period will expire sooner and if the patient's detention is to continue it must be reviewed and renewed more frequently. This clause is informed by the principle of least restriction and therapeutic benefit.

213. Subsection (2) inserts a new subsection (2A) into section 19 of the Act. The effect of this provision is to treat guardianship patients who are transferred to hospital, for the purpose of section 20, as having been admitted for treatment on the date that they are transferred.

214. Subsection (3) substitutes section 20 subsection (1) and (2) of the Act and also inserts a new section 20(2A). Amended section 20 subsection (1)(a) provides that a patient may not be kept in detention for treatment for longer than three months without the authority for the patient's detention being renewed. Amended section 20 subsection (1)(b) retains the six-month initial detention period for guardianship patients.

215. The new section 20 subsection (2) of the Act will provide for shorter detention periods where the authority for detention from the expiration of the period referred to in section 20(1)(a) is renewed. Relevantly, the new section 20 subsection (2)(a) provides that the authority for a patient who is detained in hospital for treatment, can be renewed for a further three months. This amendment shortens the subsequent detention period from six months to three months. Section 20 subsection (2)(b) provides that the authority for detention from the expiration of the period referred to in section 20 (2)(a) may only be renewed for a further six months. This shortens the subsequent detention period from one year to six months. Thereafter, section 20 subsection (2)(c) allows for the authority to detain a patient for treatment to be renewed for successive periods of one year.

216. The new subsection (2A) retains the existing periods of renewal for guardianship. Unlike detention for treatment and CTOs, concerns have not been raised around the renewal periods for guardianship. The authority to detain a patient under guardianship can be renewed after the initial six months of detention for a further period of six months, and thereafter for successive periods of one year.

217. Clause 28 subsection (4) amends section 21B to insert references to the new section 20 subsection (2A) at sections 21B subsection (5) and (6)(b) so that the section cross refers where appropriate to the new amended detention period provisions.

218. Clause 29 subsection (5) amends Part 1 of Schedule 1 of the Act, which applies the provisions of Part 2 of the Act, with modifications to unrestricted Part 3 patients. The effect of these amendments is to apply the shortened detention periods under section 20 subsection (1) and (2) to unrestricted Part 3 patients who have been transferred from guardianship to hospital (new paragraph 5B of Schedule 1 Part 1) or whose CTO is revoked, and the revocation occurs more than six months after the original hospital order was made (new paragraph 5D of Schedule 1 Part 1). For all other unrestricted Part 3 patients (including those whose CTO is revoked, and the revocation occurs less than six months after the original hospital order was made, via new paragraph 5C to Schedule 1 Part 1) the periods under section 20 subsection (1) and (2) are modified, so that the initial detention period for these cohort of patients remains six months (new paragraph 6 of Schedule 1 Part 1). This is because hospital orders are made by the sentencing court and as such the initial detention for these patients will have been subject to a robust judicial-led process. Where such patient's detention is to continue, the authority for detention can be renewed for a further six months and thereafter yearly. Paragraph 5(c)(ii) and 6 have the effect of ensuring that renewal periods for transferred guardianship patients run from date of transfer.

219. Clause 29 subsection (6) amends Part 2 of Schedule 1, paragraph 5, which applies certain provisions of Part 2 of the Act with modifications to restricted Part 3 patients.

29
Detention periods
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 19 (regulations as to transfers of patients), after subsection (2)
 
 
insert—
 
 
“(2A)
But, in the case of a patient falling within subsection (2)(d), section 20
15
 
has effect as if the patient had been admitted to hospital in pursuance
 
 
of an application for admission for treatment on the day on which the
 
 
patient is transferred.”
 
 
(3)
In section 20 (duration of authority)—
 
 
(a)
for subsections (1) and (2) substitute—
20
 
“(1)
Subject to the following provisions of this Part—
 
 
(a)
a patient admitted to hospital in pursuance of an
 
 
application for admission for treatment may be detained
 
 
in a hospital for a period not exceeding three months
 
 
beginning with the day on which the patient was so
25
 
admitted, but may not be so detained for any longer
 
 
period unless the authority for the patient’s detention
 
 
is renewed under this section;
 
 
(b)
a patient placed under guardianship in pursuance of a
 
 
guardianship application may be kept under
30
 
guardianship for a period not exceeding six months
 
 
beginning with the day on which the guardianship
 
 
application was accepted, but may not be so kept for
 
 
any longer period unless the authority for the patient’s
 
 
guardianship is renewed under this section.
35
 
(2)
Authority for the detention of a patient may, unless the patient
 
 
has previously been discharged under section 23, be renewed—
 
 
(a)
from the expiration of the period referred to in
 
 
subsection (1)(a), for a further period of three months;
 
 
(b)
from the expiration of any period of renewal under
40
 
paragraph (a), for a further period of six months;
 

Page 39

 
(c)
from the expiration of any period of renewal under
 
 
paragraph (b), for a further period of one year, and so
 
 
on for periods of one year at a time.
 
 
(2A)
Authority for the guardianship of a patient may, unless the
 
 
patient has previously been discharged under section 23, be
5
 
renewed—
 
 
(a)
from the expiration of the period referred to in
 
 
subsection (1)(b), for a further period of six months;
 
 
(b)
from the expiration of any period of renewal under
 
 
paragraph (a), for a further period of one year, and so
10
 
on for periods of one year at a time.”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (8), after “subsection (2)” insert “or (2A) ”.
 
 
(4)
In section 21B (patients who are taken into custody or return after more than
 
 
28 days)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (5), after “20(2)” insert “or (2A) ”;
15
 
(b)
in subsection (6)(b), after “20(2)” insert “or (2A) ”.
 
 
(5)
In Part 1 of Schedule 1 (application of certain provisions to patients subject
 
 
to hospital and guardianship orders)—
 
 
(a)
in paragraph 2, at the end insert “(subject to any qualifications
 
 
expressed in those paragraphs)”;
20
 
(b)
in paragraph 2B, for paragraph (c) substitute—
 
 
“(c)
subsection (5) is to be omitted.”;
 
 
(c)
in paragraph 5—
 
 
(i)
for “section 19(2)” substitute “section 19—
 
 
“(a)
in subsection (2)”;
25
 
(ii)
at the end insert—
 
 
“(b)
subsection (2A) is to be omitted.”;
 
 
(d)
after paragraph 5A insert—
 
 
“5B
(1)
The modifications of section 20 made by this paragraph
 
 
apply in relation to a patient transferred from guardianship
30
 
to a hospital in pursuance of regulations made under section
 
 
19.
 
 
(2)
In section 20(1)(a)—
 
 
(a)
for “in pursuance of an application for admission for
 
 
treatment” there is to be substituted “as a result of
35
 
being transferred in pursuance of regulations under
 
 
section 19 ”;
 
 
(b)
for “admitted”, in the second place it occurs, there is
 
 
to be substituted “transferred”.
 
 
5C
(1)
The modifications of section 20 made by this paragraph
40
 
apply in relation to a patient in respect of whom a
 
 
community treatment order was revoked under section 17F
 

Page 40

 
within the period of six months beginning with the date of
 
 
the relevant order or direction under Part 3.
 
 
(2)
In section 20(1)(a)—
 
 
(a)
for “application for admission for treatment” there is
 
 
to be substituted “order or direction under Part 3 of
5
 
this Act”;
 
 
(b)
for “three months” there is to be substituted “six
 
 
months”;
 
 
(c)
for “day on which the patient was so admitted” there
 
 
is to be substituted “day on which the community
10
 
treatment order in respect of the patient was
 
 
revoked”.
 
 
(3)
In section 20(2)—
 
 
(a)
in paragraph (a), for “three months” there is to be
 
 
substituted “six months”;
15
 
(b)
in paragraph (b), for “six months” there is to be
 
 
substituted “one year”.
 
 
5D
(1)
The modifications of section 20 made by this paragraph
 
 
apply in relation to a patient in respect of whom a
 
 
community treatment order was revoked under section 17F
20
 
after the end of the period of six months beginning with the
 
 
date of the relevant order or direction under Part 3.
 
 
(2)
In section 20(1)(a)—
 
 
(a)
for “application for admission for treatment” there is
 
 
to be substituted “order or direction under Part 3 of
25
 
this Act”;
 
 
(b)
for “day on which the patient was so admitted” there
 
 
is to be substituted “day on which the community
 
 
treatment order in respect of the patient was
 
 
revoked”.”;
30
 
(e)
for paragraph 6 substitute—
 
 
“6
(1)
The modifications of section 20 made by this paragraph
 
 
apply in relation to a patient where none of paragraphs 5B
 
 
to 5D applies.
 
 
(2)
In section 20(1)—
35
 
(a)
in paragraph (a)—
 
 
(i)
for “application for admission for treatment”
 
 
there is to be substituted “order or direction
 
 
under Part 3 of this Act”;
 
 
(ii)
for “three months” there is to be substituted
40
 
“six months”;
 
 
(iii)
for “day on which the patient was so
 
 
admitted” there is to be substituted “date of
 
 
the relevant order or direction under Part 3
 
 
of this Act”;
45

Page 41

 
(b)
in paragraph (b)—
 
 
(i)
for “a guardianship application” there is to
 
 
be substituted “an order under Part 3 of this
 
 
Act”;
 
 
(ii)
for “day on which the guardianship
5
 
application was accepted” there is to be
 
 
substituted “date of the relevant order under
 
 
Part 3 of this Act”.
 
 
(3)
In section 20(2)—
 
 
(a)
in paragraph (a), for “three months” there is to be
10
 
substituted “six months”;
 
 
(b)
in paragraph (b), for “six months” there is to be
 
 
substituted “one year”.”
 
 
(6)
In Part 2 of Schedule 1 (application of certain provisions to patients subject
 
 
to special restrictions), in paragraph 5, after paragraph (b) insert—
15
 
“(ba)
subsection (2A) is to be omitted;”.
 
 
(7)
In Schedule 5 (transitional and saving provisions), in paragraph 9 omit
 
 
sub-paragraph (2).
 

Periods for applications and references to tribunal

 
"Periods for tribunal applications"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

220. In England, the First-tier Tribunal (Mental Health), which is part of the Health, Education and Social Care Chamber of the First-tier Tribunal and, in Wales, the Mental Health Review Tribunal for Wales (together the “the Tribunal"), are independent judicial bodies which have the power to direct the discharge of a patient or recommend the discharge of certain offender patients subject to special restrictions, where it considers that the patient should no longer be detained under the Act.

221. A patient's detention is reviewed by the Tribunal on application by or on behalf of the patient, on referral from the Secretary of State (or in Wales by Welsh Ministers) or on referral by hospital managers for certain patients, where a patient's case has not been considered by the Tribunal within a specified period.

222. The Bill extends the period during which a patient may apply to the Tribunal and extends the existing referral system to increase the frequency and widen the group of patients in respect of whom referrals to the Tribunal must be made ("automatic referrals").

223. These changes are intended to ensure patients have greater access to the Tribunal and those patients who lack the ability or initiative to make an application to the Tribunal can benefit from the safeguard of increased independent judicial scrutiny of their detention by the Tribunal on a more regular basis. This measure is informed by the principle of least restriction.

224. Section 66(1) of the Act provides patients detained under Part 2 of the Act, and on certain occasions, their nearest relatives, the right to make an application to the Tribunal to have their detention reviewed. Section 66(2) of the Act sets out the periods for when patients (or their nearest relatives) may make such an application. These periods vary depending on the section of the Act under which a patient is detained.

225. Section 75 of the Act makes provision for the occasions when a referral must be made, or the period an application may be made to the Tribunal, in respect of a restricted patient who has been conditionally discharged.

226. Clause 30 will extend the period in which a patient admitted in pursuance of an application for assessment may apply to the Tribunal to be discharged from detention. Clause 30 also provides conditionally discharged patients the right to apply to the Tribunal for a review of their detention.

227. Subsection (1)(a) amends section 66(2)(a) of the Act (applications to Tribunals) to extend the period in which a patient detained under section 2 of the Act who is detained in hospital pursuant to an application for assessment, can apply to the Tribunal from 14 days to 21 days, beginning with the day on which the patient is admitted.

228. Subsection (1)(b) amends section 66(2)(b) of the Act, to reduce the period in which a patient who is admitted to a hospital under section 3 of the Act in pursuance of an application for admission for treatment, can apply to the Tribunal, from six months to three months. This change reflects the amendments made by clause 28(3), which shortens the initial detention period for patients admitted for treatment under section 3 from six months to three months.

229. Subsection (2)(a) amends section 75(1) to clarify that `conditionally discharged' means a patient who is discharged under section 42(2), 73 or 74 of the Act.

230. Subsection (2)(b) amends section 75(2) to clarify that `conditionally discharged' patients, who are not subject to conditions amounting to a deprivation of liberty under the 2005 Act (“DoL conditions") and who have not been recalled to hospital, have the right to make an application to the Tribunal for a review of their detention between 12 months and two years from the date on which the patient was conditionally discharged or ceased to be subject to DoL conditions, and thereafter every two years.

231. Subsection (2)(c) inserts a new subsection (2A) after section 75(2) of the Act to provide patients who are conditionally discharged and subject to DoL conditions the right to make an application to the Tribunal between six months and 12 months from the date on which the patient became subject to the DoL conditions and thereafter every two years.

30
Periods for tribunal applications
20
 
(1)
In section 66 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (applications to tribunals), in
 
 
subsection (2)—
 
 
(a)
in paragraph (a), for “14 days” substitute “21 days”;
 
 
(b)
in paragraph (b), for “six months” substitute “three months”;
 
 
(c)
in paragraph (e), for “six months” substitute “three months”.
25
 
(2)
In section 75 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (applications and references
 
 
concerning conditionally discharged restricted patients)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1), after “above” insert “(“conditionally discharged”)”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (2)—
 
 
(i)
in the words before paragraph (a), for “as aforesaid but”
30
 
substitute “, is not subject to conditions amounting to a
 
 
deprivation of liberty and”;
 
 
(ii)
in paragraph (a), for the words from “beginning” to
 
 
“discharged”, substitute “beginning—
 
 
“(i)
in the case of a patient who has
35
 
previously been subject to conditions
 
 
amounting to a deprivation of liberty,
 
 
with the date on which the patient most
 
 
recently ceased to be subject to such
 
 
conditions, and
40

Page 42

 
(ii)
in any other case, with the date on which
 
 
the patient was conditionally
 
 
discharged”;
 
 
(c)
after subsection (2) insert—
 
 
“(2A)
Where a restricted patient has been conditionally discharged,
5
 
is subject to conditions amounting to a deprivation of liberty
 
 
and has not been recalled to hospital, the patient may apply
 
 
to the appropriate tribunal—
 
 
(a)
in the period between the expiration of six months and
 
 
the expiration of 12 months beginning with the date on
10
 
which the patient most recently became subject to
 
 
conditions amounting to a deprivation of liberty
 
 
(whether or not that was the date on which the patient
 
 
was conditionally discharged), and
 
 
(b)
in any subsequent period of two years.”
15
"References to tribunal"

Source Bill 225 EN 2024-25

232. Section 68 of the Act places a duty on hospital managers to refer patients automatically to the Tribunal in specified circumstances. This section applies to patients who are detained in hospital under Part 2 of the Act, patients detained in hospital under Part 3 of the Act who are not subject to any special restrictions (“unrestricted Part 3 patients"), and patients subject to a community treatment order.

233. Clause 31 amends the Act in relation to automatic referrals by hospital managers for those patients to whom section 68 of the Act applies.

234. Subsection 4(b) amends section 68 subsection (2) of the Act so that the duty on hospital managers to make a referral arises on the expiry of the “relevant period". The "relevant period" is defined by the insertion of a new subsection (4A) to the Act. The "relevant period" varies depending on the type of patient as set out below. Broadly the intended effect is for automatic referrals to immediately follow the expiry of the period in which a patient could make an application to the Tribunal.

235. Subsection (4)(c)(i) and (ii) amends section 68 subsection (3) of the Act so that the duty on a hospital manager to make a referral under the amended section 68 subsection (2) will not arise where a patient has exercised their right to apply as specified by section 68 subsection (3) to the Tribunal during the "relevant period". In these circumstances an automatic referral will not be necessary as the patient's case will have already been considered by the Tribunal.

236. Subsection (4)(e) inserts a new subsection (4A) to the Act to bring forward the automatic referral period. Subparagraph (a) of the new subsection (4A) requires hospital managers to refer patients who are detained pursuant to an application for admission for assessment ("section 2 patients") whose detention has been extended under section 30B(4), to the Tribunal three months from the day on which the patient was detained under section 2 of the Act.

237. Subparagraph (b) of the new subsection (4A) describes the circumstances in which an automatic referral must be made earlier and at more frequent intervals in respect of patients who are admitted for treatment under section 3 ("section 3 patients"). A hospital manager must refer a section 3 patient to the Tribunal, three months from the day on which the patient was first detained under section 3, including any period in which a patient was detained under section 2 for assessment. Where a section 3 patient's detention is renewed, the hospital managers must make a referral to the Tribunal, 12 months from the day on which the patient was first detained and thereafter on any subsequent renewal, a referral must be made on the expiry of each subsequent 12 month period.

238. Subparagraph (c) of the new subsection (4A) describes the circumstances in which an automatic referral must be made in respect of patients who are subject to a CTO (“community patients"). Subsection 4(f)(ii) amends section 68 subsection (5) of the Act so that reference to "the applicable day" in respect to community patients means the date on which the CTO was made. These provisions provide that a hospital manager is under a duty to refer a community patient to the Tribunal on the expiry of six months, 12 months and thereafter every subsequent period of 12 months from the date on which the CTO was made.

239. Subsection (4)(h) removes section 68 subsection (7) of the Act so that there is no longer an automatic referral following the revocation of a CTO. In practice, it was found that this automatic referral was an ineffective safeguard, as often the patient is either back in the community subject to a new CTO or they have reverted to a section 3 patient, before the Tribunal has reviewed their case.

240. Where a patient's CTO is revoked, by virtue of section 17G of the Act (effect of revoking CTO), the patient is treated as if they have been admitted pursuant to an application for admission for treatment. Subsection (2) amends section 17G(5) to include reference to section 68. This amendment allows the automatic referral periods in the new subsection (4A)(b) to apply afresh from the date on which the CTO is revoked. For such patients, a hospital manager will be under a duty to make a referral to the Tribunal on the expiry of three months, 12 months and thereafter each subsequent period of 12 months from the date that the CTO was revoked.

241. Section 19 of the Act governs the regulations that may be prescribed in relation to the transfer of patients. Section 19(2)(d) provides that where a patient is transferred from guardianship to a hospital, they are treated as having been admitted to hospital for treatment from the date that the guardianship application is accepted. Subsection (3) inserts reference to section 68 to the new subsection 19(2A), which is inserted by clause 28 subsection (2) after section 19 subsection (2) of the Act. The effect of this provision is to treat transferred guardianship patients, for the purpose of section 68, as having been admitted for treatment on the date that they are transferred to hospital. This amendment allows the automatic referrals in the new subsection (4A)(b) to apply to transferred guardianship patients. For such patients, an automatic referral will arise on the expiry of three months, 12 months and thereafter each subsequent period of 12 months from the date of the transfer.

242. As revoked CTO patients and patients transferred from guardianship are treated as patients who are admitted to hospital on the date of the revocation or transfer, such patients would fall within section 68 subsection (1)(b) of the Act (admission for treatment). Consequently, section 68(1)(d) and (e) of the Act is repealed by subsection (4)(a) and section 68 subsection (5)(d) is repealed by subsection (4)(f)(iii) as these provisions are no longer necessary.

243. Subsection (7) amends Part 1 of Schedule 1, paragraph 10 of the Act, to ensure that Part 3 guardianship order patients who are transferred to hospital and Part 3 CTO patients whose CTO is revoked and a period of more than six months has passed since the courts first made an order under Part 3 of the Act have the same automatic referral periods as Part 2 patients who have been transferred from guardianship to hospital and Part 2 patients whose CTO has been revoked.

244. Subsection 4(g) amends section 68 subsection (6) of the Act to reduce the automatic referral period from three years to 12 months. The effect is to require hospital managers to refer all Part 2 patients and unrestricted Part 3 patients, to whom section 68 applies, to the

31
References to tribunal
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 17G (effect of revoking community treatment order), in subsection
 
 
(5), after “section 20” insert “and section 68”.
 
 
(3)
In section 19(2A) (as inserted by section 29 of this Act) for “has” substitute
20
 
“and section 68 have”.
 
 
(4)
In section 68 (duty of managers of hospitals to refer cases to tribunal)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1) omit paragraphs (d) and (e);
 
 
(b)
in subsection (2), for “the period of six months beginning with the
 
 
applicable day” substitute “a relevant period”;
25
 
(c)
in subsection (3)—
 
 
(i)
in the words before paragraph (a), for “that” substitute “the
 
 
relevant”;
 
 
(ii)
in paragraph (a), after “(e),” insert “(f), (fza), (fa), (faa),”;
 
 
(iii)
in paragraph (c), for “(7)” substitute “(6)”;
30
 
(d)
in subsection (4), for “period mentioned in subsection (2) above”
 
 
substitute “relevant period”;
 
 
(e)
after subsection (4) insert—
 
 
“(4A)
In this section “relevant period” means—
 
 
(a)
in the case of a patient who is admitted to a hospital
35
 
in pursuance of an application for admission for
 
 
assessment, the period of three months beginning with
 
 
the applicable day;
 
 
(b)
in the case of a patient who is admitted to hospital in
 
 
pursuance of an application for admission for
40
 
treatment—
 
 
(i)
the period of three months beginning with the
 
 
applicable day;
 

Page 43

 
(ii)
the period between the expiry of three months
 
 
and the expiry of 12 months beginning with the
 
 
applicable day;
 
 
(iii)
each subsequent period of 12 months;
 
 
(c)
in the case of a community patient—
5
 
(i)
the period of six months beginning with the
 
 
applicable day;
 
 
(ii)
the period between the expiry of six months and
 
 
the expiry of 12 months beginning with the
 
 
applicable day;
10
 
(iii)
each subsequent period of 12 months.”;
 
 
(f)
in subsection (5)—
 
 
(i)
in the words before paragraph (a), for “(2) above” substitute
 
 
“ (4A) ”;
 
 
(ii)
in paragraph (c), for the words from “or a patient” to the end
15
 
substitute “, the day on which the community treatment order
 
 
was made”;
 
 
(iii)
omit paragraph (d);
 
 
(g)
for subsection (6) substitute—
 
 
“(6)
The managers of the hospital must also refer the patient’s case
20
 
to the appropriate tribunal if—
 
 
(a)
the patient’s case has not been considered by such a
 
 
tribunal within the last 12 months, whether on the
 
 
patient’s own application or otherwise, and
 
 
(b)
there is no pending application or reference to the
25
 
appropriate tribunal in relation to the patient’s case.”;
 
 
(h)
omit subsection (7).
 
 
(5)
Omit section 68A.
 
 
(6)
In section 143 (general provisions as to regulations, orders and rules)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (2)(b), as inserted by section 38 of this Act, omit “or
30
 
68A(7)”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (3) omit “, 68A(1)”;
 
 
(c)
in subsection (3C) omit “, or an order under section 68A(7) above,”;
 
 
(d)
omit subsection (3D).
 
 
(7)
In Part 1 of Schedule 1 (application of certain provisions to patients subject
35
 
to hospital and guardianship orders), in paragraph 10—
 
 
(a)
the existing text becomes sub-paragraph (1);
 
 
(b)
in sub-paragraph (1), for paragraph (b) substitute—
 
 
“(b)
subsections (2) to (5) are to apply if—
 
 
(i)
the patient falls within paragraph (b) of
40
 
subsection (1) as a result of being—
 
 
(A)
a patient who was transferred from
 
 
guardianship to hospital in pursuance
 

Page 44

 
of regulations made under section 19,
 
 
or
 
 
(B)
a patient in respect of whom a
 
 
community treatment order was
 
 
revoked, where the revocation took
5
 
place after the end of the period of six
 
 
months beginning with the date of the
 
 
relevant order or direction under Part
 
 
3 of this Act, or
 
 
(ii)
the patient falls within paragraph (c) of
10
 
subsection (1),
 
 
but otherwise are not to apply.”;
 
 
(c)
after sub-paragraph (1) insert—
 
 
“(2)
In the application of subsections (2) to (5) of section 68 by
 
 
virtue of sub-paragraph (1) (b) , those subsections apply as if
15
 
the patient had been admitted to hospital in pursuance of
 
 
an application for admission for treatment on the day on
 
 
which the patient was transferred or the community
 
 
treatment order was revoked.”
 
32
References: restricted patients subject to deprivation of liberty conditions
20
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 71 (references by Secretary of State concerning restricted patients)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (3A), for the words from “include” to the end substitute
 
 
“make—
 
 
“(a)
provision subject to specified exceptions,
25
 
(b)
different provision for different cases or areas, and
 
 
(c)
transitional, consequential, incidental or supplemental
 
 
provision.”;
 
 
(b)
after subsection (4) insert—
 
 
“(4A)
Sections 73 and 74 do not apply to a reference under subsection
30
 
(1) in respect of a patient who has been conditionally
 
 
discharged and not recalled to hospital but on any such
 
 
reference the tribunal may—
 
 
(a)
vary any condition to which the patient is subject in
 
 
connection with the patient’s discharge or impose any
35
 
condition which might have been imposed in connection
 
 
with their discharge, or
 
 
(b)
direct that the restriction order, limitation direction or
 
 
restriction direction to which the patient is subject ceases
 
 
to have effect,
40
 
and if the tribunal gives a direction under paragraph (b) the
 
 
patient ceases to be liable to be detained by virtue of the
 
 
relevant hospital order, hospital direction or transfer direction.
 

Page 45

 
(4B)
Conditions amounting to a deprivation of liberty may be
 
 
imposed under subsection (4A) (a) only if the tribunal is
 
 
satisfied—
 
 
(a)
that conditions amounting to a deprivation of the
 
 
patient’s liberty are necessary for the protection of
5
 
another person from serious harm while the patient
 
 
remains discharged from hospital, and
 
 
(b)
that for the patient to remain discharged subject to those
 
 
conditions would be no less beneficial to their mental
 
 
health than for them to be recalled to hospital.”
10
 
(3)
In section 75 (applications and references concerning conditionally discharged
 
 
restricted patients)—
 
 
(a)
after subsection (2A) (as inserted by section 30 (2) (c) of this Act) insert—
 
 
“(2C)
Where a restricted patient has been conditionally discharged,
 
 
is subject to conditions amounting to a deprivation of liberty
15
 
and has not been recalled to hospital, the Secretary of State
 
 
must refer the patient’s case to the appropriate tribunal on the
 
 
expiry of—
 
 
(a)
the period of 12 months beginning with the date on
 
 
which the patient most recently became subject to
20
 
conditions amounting to a deprivation of liberty
 
 
(whether or not that was the date on which the patient
 
 
was conditionally discharged), and
 
 
(b)
each subsequent period of two years.
 
 
(2D)
The Secretary of State is not required to make a reference under
25
 
subsection (2C) if the patient’s case was considered by the
 
 
appropriate tribunal during the period in question.
 
 
(2E)
The Secretary of State must refer to the appropriate tribunal
 
 
the case of any restricted patient who has been conditionally
 
 
discharged, is subject to conditions amounting to a deprivation
30
 
of liberty and has not been recalled to hospital if—
 
 
(a)
the patient’s case has not been considered by the
 
 
appropriate tribunal within the last four years, and
 
 
(b)
there is no pending application or reference to the
 
 
appropriate tribunal in relation to the patient’s case.
35
 
(2F)
The Secretary of State may by order vary the length of a period
 
 
mentioned in subsection (2C) or (2E) .
 
 
(2G)
An order under subsection (2F) may make—
 
 
(a)
provision subject to specified exceptions;
 
 
(b)
different provision for different cases or areas;
40
 
(c)
transitional, consequential, incidental or supplemental
 
 
provision.
 
 
(2H)
Any reference under subsection (2C) or (2E) must be made to
 
 
the tribunal for the area in which the patient resides.
 

Page 46

 
(2I)
References in this section to the patient’s case being considered
 
 
by the appropriate tribunal are to the patient’s case being
 
 
considered by the appropriate tribunal on the patient’s own
 
 
application or otherwise.”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (3)—
5
 
(i)
after “subsection (2) above” insert “, or any reference under
 
 
subsection (2C) or (2E) ”;
 
 
(ii)
after “such application” insert “or reference”;
 
 
(c)
after subsection (3) insert—
 
 
“(4)
Conditions amounting to a deprivation of liberty may be
10
 
imposed under subsection (3)(a) only if the tribunal is
 
 
satisfied—
 
 
(a)
that conditions amounting to a deprivation of the
 
 
patient’s liberty are necessary for the protection of
 
 
another person from serious harm while the patient
15
 
remains discharged from hospital, and
 
 
(b)
that for the patient to remain discharged subject to those
 
 
conditions would be no less beneficial to their mental
 
 
health than for them to be recalled to hospital.”
 
 
(4)
In section 143 (general provisions as to regulations, orders and rules), in
20
 
subsection (3), for “or 71(3)” substitute “, 71(3) or 75 (2F) ”.
 
 
(5)
The amendments made by this section apply in relation to any person who
 
 
is a restricted patient within the meaning given by subsection (1) of section
 
 
79 of the Mental Health Act 1983, or is treated as a restricted patient as a
 
 
result of that subsection, whether the person became such a patient (or treated
25
 
as such a patient) before or after the coming into force of this section.
 
33
References: restricted patients not subject to deprivation of liberty conditions
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 71 (references by Secretary of State concerning restricted patients),
 
 
for subsection (2) substitute—
30
 
“(2)
The Secretary of State must refer to the appropriate tribunal the case
 
 
of any restricted patient detained in a hospital if—
 
 
(a)
the patient’s case has not been considered by the appropriate
 
 
tribunal within the last 12 months, whether on the patient’s
 
 
own application or otherwise, and
35
 
(b)
there is no pending application or reference to the appropriate
 
 
tribunal in relation to the patient’s case.”
 
 
(3)
In section 75 (applications and references concerning conditionally discharged
 
 
restricted patients)—
 
 
(a)
before subsection (2C) (as inserted by section 32 (3) (a) of this Act)
40
 
insert—
 
 
“(2B)
Where a restricted patient has been conditionally discharged,
 
 
is not subject to conditions amounting to a deprivation of
 

Page 47

 
liberty and has not been recalled to hospital, the Secretary of
 
 
State must refer the patient’s case to the appropriate tribunal
 
 
on the expiry of—
 
 
(a)
the period of two years beginning—
 
 
(i)
in the case of a patient who has previously been
5
 
subject to conditions amounting to a deprivation
 
 
of liberty, with the date on which the patient
 
 
most recently ceased to be subject to such
 
 
conditions, and
 
 
(ii)
in any other case, with the date on which the
10
 
patient was conditionally discharged, and
 
 
(b)
each subsequent period of four years.”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (2D), after “subsection” insert “ (2B) or”;
 
 
(c)
in subsection (2E) omit “, is subject to conditions amounting to a
 
 
deprivation of liberty”;
15
 
(d)
in subsection (2F), after “subsection” insert “ (2B) ,”;
 
 
(e)
in subsection (2H), after “subsection” insert “ (2B) ,”;
 
 
(f)
in subsection (3), after “subsection”, in the second place it occurs, insert
 
 
“ (2B) ,”.
 
 
(4)
The amendments made by this section apply in relation to any person who
20
 
is a restricted patient within the meaning given by subsection (1) of section
 
 
79 of the Mental Health Act 1983, or is treated as a restricted patient as a
 
 
result of that subsection, whether the person became such a patient (or treated
 
 
as such a patient) before or after the coming into force of this section.
 

Discharge: process

25
34
Discharge: process
 
 
In section 23 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (discharge of patients), after
 
 
subsection (2) insert—
 
 
“(2A)
Before making an order for discharge by virtue of subsection (2)(a),
 
 
the responsible clinician must consult a person—
30
 
(a)
who has been professionally concerned with the patient’s
 
 
medical treatment, and
 
 
(b)
who belongs to a profession other than that to which the
 
 
responsible clinician belongs.
 
 
(2B)
Before making an order for discharge by virtue of subsection (2)(b)—
35
 
(a)
the responsible clinician must consult a person—
 
 
(i)
who has been professionally concerned with the
 
 
patient’s care or treatment, and
 
 
(ii)
who belongs to a profession other than that to which
 
 
the responsible clinician belongs;
40
 
(b)
the responsible local social services authority must ensure that
 
 
whoever is taking the decision for the authority consults a
 
 
person who has been professionally concerned with the patient's
 

Page 48

 
care or treatment (whether or not a member of staff of the
 
 
authority);
 
 
(c)
the patient’s nominated person must consult the responsible
 
 
local social services authority.
 
 
(2C)
Before making an order for discharge by virtue of subsection (2)(c)—
5
 
(a)
the responsible clinician must, if they are not the community
 
 
clinician, consult the community clinician;
 
 
(b)
the hospital managers must consult the community clinician.”
 
35
Ascertaining and learning from patients’ experiences of hospital treatment
 
 
After section 23 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (discharge of patients) insert—
10
 
“23A
Ascertaining and learning from patients’ experiences of hospital
 
 
treatment
 
 
(1)
A patient who has been detained under this Part of this Act must,
 
 
within 30 days of their discharge, be offered a consultation with an
 
 
independent mental health advocate to review their experiences of
15
 
hospital treatment.
 
 
(2)
A report from any consultation undertaken pursuant to subsection (1)
 
 
shall be produced by the independent mental health advocate in
 
 
partnership with the patient.
 
 
(3)
The report referred to in subsection (2) shall be provided to the
20
 
managers of the hospital within 14 days of its completion.
 
 
(4)
The managers of the hospital shall publish each year a report setting
 
 
out what they have learned from patients’ experiences at the hospital,
 
 
and the actions they have taken.”
 

Patients concerned in criminal proceedings or under sentence

25
36
Conditional discharge subject to deprivation of liberty conditions
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 42 (powers of Secretary of State in respect of patients subject to
 
 
restriction orders), after subsection (2) insert—
 
 
“(2A)
Conditions amounting to a deprivation of a patient’s liberty may be
30
 
imposed under subsection (2) if the Secretary of State is satisfied that
 
 
those conditions are necessary for the protection of the public from
 
 
serious harm.”
 
 
(3)
In section 73 (power of tribunal to discharge patients subject to restriction
 
 
orders)—
35
 
(a)
in subsection (2)—
 
 
(i)
omit the “but” at the end of paragraph (a);
 

Page 49

 
(ii)
at the end of paragraph (b), after “apply” insert “; and
 
 
“(c)
the tribunal—
 
 
(i)
is not satisfied that conditions amounting
 
 
to a deprivation of the patient’s liberty
 
 
would be necessary for the protection of
5
 
another person from serious harm, if the
 
 
patient were discharged from hospital;
 
 
or
 
 
(ii)
is satisfied that conditions amounting to
 
 
a deprivation of the patient’s liberty
10
 
would be necessary for the protection of
 
 
another person from serious harm if the
 
 
patient were discharged from hospital,
 
 
and is also satisfied that for the patient
 
 
to be discharged subject to those
15
 
conditions would be no less beneficial to
 
 
their mental health than for them to
 
 
remain in hospital”;
 
 
(b)
after subsection (5) insert—
 
 
“(5A)
Conditions amounting to a deprivation of a patient’s liberty
20
 
may be imposed by the tribunal under subsection (4)(b) only
 
 
where the tribunal is satisfied as to the matters mentioned in
 
 
subsection (2)(c)(ii).
 
 
(5B)
Conditions amounting to a deprivation of a patient’s liberty
 
 
may be imposed by the Secretary of State under subsection
25
 
(4)(b) or (5) only where the Secretary of State is satisfied that
 
 
those conditions are necessary for the protection of the public
 
 
from serious harm.”
 
 
(4)
In section 145(1) (interpretation), at the appropriate place insert—
 
 
““deprivation of liberty” and related expressions are to be construed in
30
 
accordance with section 64(5) and (6) of the Mental Capacity Act 2005;”.
 
 
(5)
The amendments made by this section apply in relation to any person who
 
 
is a restricted patient within the meaning given by subsection (1) of section
 
 
79 of the Mental Health Act 1983, or is treated as a restricted patient as a
 
 
result of that subsection, whether the person became such a patient (or treated
35
 
as such a patient) before or after the coming into force of this section.
 
37
Transfers of prisoners and others to hospital: conditions
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 47 (removal to hospital of persons serving sentences of imprisonment
 
 
etc) for subsection (1)(c) substitute—
40
 
“(c)
that appropriate medical treatment can be given for the relevant
 
 
disorder from which the person is suffering;”.
 
 
(3)
In section 48 (removal to hospital of other prisoners)—
 

Page 50

 
(a)
for subsection (1)(c) substitute—
 
 
“(c)
appropriate medical treatment can be given for the
 
 
relevant disorder from which the person is suffering;”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (2), for paragraph (d) substitute—
 
 
“(d)
persons detained under—
5
 
(i)
the Immigration Act 1971,
 
 
(ii)
section 62 of the Nationality, Immigration and
 
 
Asylum Act 2002 (detention by Secretary of
 
 
State),
 
 
(iii)
section 36 of the UK Borders Act 2007 (detention
10
 
of offenders for deportation), or
 
 
(iv)
regulation 32 of the Immigration (European
 
 
Economic Area) Regulations 2016 (S.I. 2016/1052)
 
 
(which are saved by the Citizens’ Rights
 
 
(Restrictions of Rights of Entry and Residence)
15
 
(EU Exit) Regulations 2020 (S.I. 2020/1210)).”
 
38
Transfers of prisoners and others to hospital: time limits
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
After section 47 insert—
 
“47A
Hospital treatment for prisoners: 28 day transfer period
20
 
(1)
As soon as practicable after a relevant referring body makes an initial
 
 
request for a medical report in relation to a person serving a sentence
 
 
of imprisonment (“P”), the body must give a referral notice to the
 
 
persons specified in subsection (3) .
 
 
(2)
For the purposes of this section—
25
 
(a)
a request is an “initial request” for a medical report if it is the
 
 
first request for a report by a registered medical practitioner
 
 
on whether the conditions in section 47(1) are satisfied in
 
 
relation to P at a particular time;
 
 
(b)
“referral notice” means a notice—
30
 
(i)
stating that an initial request has been made in relation
 
 
to P, and
 
 
(ii)
specifying the date on which the initial request was
 
 
made;
 
 
(c)
“relevant referring body” means—
35
 
(i)
in relation to a person serving a sentence of
 
 
imprisonment in England, a person who is a “service
 
 
provider” within the meaning given by section 12ZA(9)
 
 
of the National Health Service Act 2006 or provides
 
 
“NHS medical services” within the meaning given by
40
 
section 14Z31(5) of that Act;
 
 
(ii)
in relation to a person serving a sentence of
 
 
imprisonment in Wales, a Local Health Board.
 

Page 51

 
(3)
The persons to whom the referral notice must be given (“the notified
 
 
authorities”) are—
 
 
(a)
the Secretary of State;
 
 
(b)
the relevant detention authority (see section 48B );
 
 
(c)
as many of the following (other than the relevant referring
5
 
body) as the relevant referring body considers likely to have
 
 
functions in relation to P in the event that the Secretary of State
 
 
gives a direction under section 47—
 
 
(i)
NHS England;
 
 
(ii)
integrated care boards;
10
 
(iii)
National Health Service trusts established under section
 
 
18 of the National Health Service (Wales) Act 2006;
 
 
(iv)
Local Health Boards;
 
 
(v)
service providers within the meaning given by section
 
 
12ZA(9) of the National Health Service Act 2006.
15
 
(4)
When exercising functions in relation to P, the relevant referring body
 
 
and the notified authorities must seek to ensure that, absent exceptional
 
 
circumstances, the following all happen within the period of 28 days
 
 
beginning with the date of the initial request—
 
 
(a)
a decision is taken as to whether to make a direction under
20
 
section 47 in respect of P;
 
 
(b)
if a decision is taken to make such a direction, the direction is
 
 
made, and
 
 
(c)
where the direction is made, P is removed to and detained in
 
 
a hospital in pursuance of the direction.
25
 
(5)
For the purposes of subsection (4) the following are not (together or
 
 
separately) “exceptional circumstances”—
 
 
(a)
a shortage of hospital accommodation;
 
 
(b)
a shortage of hospital staff;
 
 
unless occurring as a result of other exceptional circumstances.”
30
 
(3)
After section 48 insert—
 
“48A
Hospital treatment for other prisoners: 28 day transfer period
 
 
(1)
As soon as practicable after a relevant referring body makes an initial
 
 
request for a medical report in relation to a person (“P”) to whom
 
 
section 48 applies, the body must give a referral notice to the persons
35
 
specified in subsection (3) .
 
 
(2)
For the purposes of this section—
 
 
(a)
a request is an “initial request” for a medical report if it is the
 
 
first request for a report by a registered medical practitioner
 
 
on whether the conditions in section 48(1) are satisfied in
40
 
relation to P at a particular time;
 
 
(b)
“referral notice” means a notice—
 
 
(i)
stating that an initial request has been made in relation
 
 
to P, and
 

Page 52

 
(ii)
specifying the date on which the initial request was
 
 
made;
 
 
(c)
“relevant referring body” means—
 
 
(i)
in relation to a person to whom section 48 applies and
 
 
who is detained or remanded at a place in England, a
5
 
person who is a “service provider” within the meaning
 
 
given by section 12ZA(9) of the National Health Service
 
 
Act 2006 or provides “NHS medical services” within
 
 
the meaning given by section 14Z31(5) of that Act;
 
 
(ii)
in relation to a person to whom section 48 applies and
10
 
who is detained or remanded at a place in Wales, a
 
 
Local Health Board.
 
 
(3)
The persons to whom the referral notice must be given (“the notified
 
 
authorities”) are—
 
 
(a)
the Secretary of State;
15
 
(b)
the relevant detention authority (see section 48B );
 
 
(c)
as many of the following (other than the relevant referring
 
 
body) as the relevant referring body considers likely to have
 
 
functions in relation to P in the event that the Secretary of State
 
 
gives a direction under section 48—
20
 
(i)
NHS England;
 
 
(ii)
integrated care boards;
 
 
(iii)
National Health Service trusts established under section
 
 
18 of the National Health Service (Wales) Act 2006;
 
 
(iv)
Local Health Boards;
25
 
(v)
service providers within the meaning given by section
 
 
12ZA(9) of the National Health Service Act 2006.
 
 
(4)
When exercising functions in relation to P, the relevant referring body
 
 
and the notified authorities must seek to ensure that, absent exceptional
 
 
circumstances, the following all happen within the period of 28 days
30
 
beginning with the date of the initial request—
 
 
(a)
a decision is taken as to whether to make a direction under
 
 
section 48 in respect of P;
 
 
(b)
if a decision is taken to make such a direction, the direction is
 
 
made, and
35
 
(c)
where the direction is made, P is removed to and detained in
 
 
a hospital in pursuance of the direction.
 
 
(5)
For the purposes of subsection (4) the following are not (together or
 
 
separately) “exceptional circumstances”—
 
 
(a)
a shortage of hospital accommodation;
40
 
(b)
a shortage of hospital staff;
 
 
unless occurring as a result of other exceptional circumstances.”
 

Page 53

 
(4)
After section 48A (inserted by subsection (3)) insert—
 
“48B
Sections 47A and 48A: supplementary
 
 
(1)
For the purposes of sections 47A and 48A , “the relevant detention
 
 
authority”, in relation to a referral notice (within the meaning of the
 
 
section in question), has the meaning given by the table.
5
 
Where, on the day the referral
 
 
The relevant detention authority is
 
 
notice is sent, P is detained or
 
 
remanded in
 
 
a prison
 
 
the governor or director of the
 
 
prison
10
 
a young offender institution
 
 
the governor or director of the
 
 
institution
 
 
a secure training centre
 
 
the governor or director of the
 
 
centre
 
 
a secure children’s home
15
 
the registered manager of the home
15
 
a removal centre
 
 
the manager of the centre
 
 
a short-term holding facility
 
 
the manager of the facility
 
 
pre-departure accommodation
 
 
the manager of the accommodation
 
 
(2)
In this section—
 
 
“pre-departure accommodation” has the meaning given by section
20
 
147 of the Immigration and Asylum Act 1999;
 
 
“registered manager” , in relation to a secure children’s home,
 
 
means a person who is registered under Part 2 of the Care
 
 
Standards Act 2000 as the manager of the home;
 
 
“removal centre” has the meaning given by section 147 of the
25
 
Immigration and Asylum Act 1999;
 
 
“secure children’s home” has the meaning given by section 102(11)
 
 
of the Legal Aid, Sentencing and Punishment of Offenders Act
 
 
2012;
 
 
“secure training centre” has the meaning given by section 43(1)(d)
30
 
of the Prison Act 1952;
 
 
“short-term holding facility” has the meaning given by section
 
 
147 of the Immigration and Asylum Act 1999;
 
 
“young offender institution” has the meaning given by section
 
 
43(1)(aa) of the Prison Act 1952.
35
 
(3)
The Secretary of State may by regulations—
 
 
(a)
amend this section or section 47A or 48A so as to change the
 
 
persons—
 
 
(i)
who are subject to the duty to give a referral notice
 
 
under section 47A (1) or 48A (1) , or
40

Page 54

 
(ii)
to whom a referral notice must be given under
 
 
subsection 47A (3) or 48A (3) ;
 
 
(b)
amend the period in 47A (4) or 48A (4) .”
 
 
(5)
In section 143 (general provisions as to regulations, orders and rules)—
 
 
(a)
for subsection (2) substitute—
5
 
“(2)
The following are subject to annulment in pursuance of a
 
 
resolution of either House of Parliament—
 
 
(a)
any Order in Council under this Act;
 
 
(b)
any order made by the Secretary of State under section
 
 
54A or 68A(7);
10
 
(c)
any statutory instrument containing regulations made
 
 
by the Secretary of State under this Act, other than
 
 
regulations made under section 48B (3) ;
 
 
(d)
any statutory instrument containing rules made under
 
 
this Act.”;
15
 
(b)
after subsection (3) insert—
 
 
“(3ZA)
A statutory instrument containing regulations under section
 
 
48B (3) (whether alone or with other provision) may not be
 
 
made unless a draft of the instrument has been laid before and
 
 
approved by a resolution of each House of Parliament.”
20
39
Transfer directions for persons detained in youth detention accommodation
 
 
(1)
In section 48 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (removal to hospital of other
 
 
prisoners), in subsection (2) (a) , for “remand centre” substitute “remanded to
 
 
youth detention accommodation under section 91 of the Legal Aid, Sentencing
 
 
and Punishment of Offenders Act 2012”.
25
 
(2)
In Schedule 8 to the Criminal Justice and Court Services Act 2000 (repeals),
 
 
in the table, omit the entry relating to section 48 (2) (a) of the Mental Health
 
 
Act 1983 .
 
40
Minor amendment
 
 
In Part 1 of Schedule 1 to the Mental Health Act 1983 (application of certain
30
 
provisions to patients subject to hospital and guardianship orders who are
 
 
not subject to special restrictions), in paragraph 9(b), for the words from “and
 
 
(g)” to ““(g)”,” substitute “, (d) and (g)”.
 

Help and information for patients

 
41
Independent mental health advocates
35
 
Schedule 3 contains amendments relating to independent mental health
 
 
advocates, including amendments which—
 
 
(a)
provide for informal patients to qualify for help from independent
 
 
mental health advocates;
 

Page 55

 
(b)
impose duties on hospital managers and others to notify providers of
 
 
advocacy services about qualifying patients;
 
 
(c)
impose duties on providers of advocacy services to arrange for certain
 
 
patients to be interviewed to find out whether they want to use those
 
 
services.
5
42
Information about complaints for detained patients
 
 
In section 132 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (duty of managers of hospitals
 
 
to give information to detained patients)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (2) omit the words from “and those steps” to the end;
 
 
(b)
after subsection (2) insert—
10
 
“(2A)
The managers of a hospital or registered establishment in which
 
 
a patient is detained under this Act must also take such steps
 
 
as are practicable to ensure that the patient understands how
 
 
to exercise any right the patient has to make complaints about—
 
 
(a)
the carrying out of functions under this Act;
15
 
(b)
any medical treatment for mental disorder received
 
 
during the patient’s detention;
 
 
(c)
the outcome of any complaint referred to in paragraph
 
 
(b) .
 
 
(2B)
Where a patient is detained under any provision of this Act,
20
 
the steps under subsections (2) and (2A) must be taken —
 
 
(a)
as soon as practicable after the commencement of the
 
 
patient’s detention under the provision in question, and
 
 
(b)
again—
 
 
(i)
if the patient is a restricted patient within the
25
 
meaning given by subsection (1) of section 79,
 
 
or is treated as mentioned in paragraph (a) or
 
 
(c) of that subsection, as soon as practicable after
 
 
the end of each successive period of twelve
 
 
months beginning with the day on which the
30
 
patient became a restricted patient or was first
 
 
so treated (as the case may be);
 
 
(ii)
otherwise, as soon as practicable after any report
 
 
is furnished under section 20 in respect of the
 
 
patient.”;
35
 
(c)
in subsection (3), for “and (2)” substitute “, (2) and (2A) ”;
 
 
(d)
in subsection (4), for “and (2)” substitute “, (2) and (2A) ”.
 
43
Information about complaints for community patients
 
 
In section 132A of the Mental Health Act 1983 (duty of managers of hospitals
 
 
to give information to community patients), in subsection (1)—
40
 
(a)
omit the “and” at the end of paragraph (a);
 

Page 56

 
(b)
after paragraph (b) insert—
 
 
“(c)
how to exercise any right the patient has to make
 
 
complaints about—
 
 
(i)
the carrying out of functions under this Act;
 
 
(ii)
any medical treatment for mental disorder
5
 
received while the patient is a community
 
 
patient;
 
 
(iii)
the outcome of any complaint referred to in
 
 
sub-paragraph (ii) ;”;
 
 
(c)
at the end insert “and again as soon as practicable after any report is
10
 
furnished under section 20A in respect of the patient”.
 
44
Information for conditionally discharged patients
 
 
After section 132A of the Mental Health Act 1983 insert—
 
 
“132B
Duty of managers of hospitals to give information to conditionally
 
 
discharged patients
15
 
(1)
Where a patient is discharged from a hospital or registered
 
 
establishment under section 42(2), 73 or 74 and the discharge is a
 
 
conditional discharge, the managers of the hospital or registered
 
 
establishment must take such steps as are practicable to ensure that
 
 
the patient understands—
20
 
(a)
under which provision the patient is conditionally discharged
 
 
and the effect of that provision;
 
 
(b)
the effect of the provisions of this Act applying to patients who
 
 
are conditionally discharged under that provision;
 
 
(c)
what rights of applying to a tribunal are available to the patient
25
 
while the patient is conditionally discharged;
 
 
(d)
how to exercise any right the patient has to make complaints
 
 
about—
 
 
(i)
the carrying out of functions under this Act;
 
 
(ii)
any medical treatment for mental disorder received
30
 
while the patient is conditionally discharged;
 
 
(iii)
the outcome of any complaint referred to in
 
 
sub-paragraph (ii) .
 
 
(2)
Those steps must be taken as soon as practicable.
 
 
(3)
The steps to be taken under subsection (1) must include giving the
35
 
requisite information both orally and in writing.
 
 
(4)
The managers of the hospital or registered establishment must, except
 
 
where the patient otherwise requests, take such steps as are practicable
 
 
to furnish the patient’s nominated person with a copy of any
 
 
information given to the patient in writing under subsection (1) .
40
 
(5)
Those steps must be taken when the information is given to the patient
 
 
or within a reasonable time thereafter.”
 

Page 57

45
Advance choice documents
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
After section 130L insert—
 
“130M
Advance choice documents: England
 
 
(1)
NHS England and each integrated care board must make such
5
 
arrangements as it considers appropriate for—
 
 
(a)
making information about advance choice documents available
 
 
to people for whom it is responsible for the purposes of this
 
 
section, and
 
 
(b)
helping such of those people as it considers appropriate to
10
 
create advance choice documents.
 
 
(2)
For the purposes of this section—
 
 
(a)
NHS England is “responsible” for any people for whom it is
 
 
required to arrange the provision of services or facilities by
 
 
virtue of section 3B(1)(c) of the National Health Service Act
15
 
2006 (prisoners etc);
 
 
(b)
an integrated care board is “responsible” for anyone not within
 
 
paragraph (a) who falls within the group of people for whom
 
 
the board has core responsibility (as to which, see section 14Z31
 
 
of the National Health Service Act 2006).
20
 
(3)
An “advance choice document” is a written statement made by a
 
 
qualifying person specifying their decisions, wishes or feelings about
 
 
any relevant matter that may arise in the event that—
 
 
(a)
at some future time—
 
 
(i)
consideration is given to the person’s admission to
25
 
hospital or a registered establishment as an in-patient
 
 
either for medical treatment for mental disorder or for
 
 
assessment in relation to mental disorder, or
 
 
(ii)
the person is detained under this Act, or given medical
 
 
treatment for mental disorder as an in-patient in
30
 
hospital, and
 
 
(b)
at that time, the person lacks capacity or competence in relation
 
 
to that matter.
 
 
(4)
For the purposes of subsection (3) —
 
 
(a)
“qualifying person” means a person who has capacity or
35
 
competence to make the statement,
 
 
(b)
“relevant matter”, in relation to a qualifying person, means a
 
 
matter relating to, or arising as a consequence of—
 
 
(i)
consideration of an application for the person’s
 
 
admission for assessment or treatment, or
40
 
(ii)
the person’s detention under this Act, or their medical
 
 
treatment for a mental disorder as an in-patient in
 
 
hospital, and
 

Page 58

 
(c)
a reference to lacking capacity is to lacking capacity within the
 
 
meaning of the Mental Capacity Act 2005; and a reference to
 
 
having capacity is to be read accordingly.
 
130N
Advance choice documents: Wales
 
 
(1)
Each Local Health Board must make such arrangements in relation to
5
 
its area as it considers appropriate for—
 
 
(a)
making available information about advance choice documents,
 
 
and
 
 
(b)
helping such of those people as it considers appropriate to
 
 
create advance choice documents.
10
 
(2)
In this section “advance choice document” has the meaning given by
 
 
section 130M (3) .”
 
 
(3)
In section 118 (code of practice), in subsection (1), after paragraph (e) (as
 
 
inserted by section 18 of this Act) insert—
 
 
“(f)
for the guidance of NHS England, integrated care boards and
15
 
Local Health Boards in relation to their functions under section
 
 
130M or 130N .””
 

After-care

 
46
Tribunal power to recommend after-care
 
 
(1)
Section 72 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (powers of tribunals) is amended
20
 
as follows.
 
 
(2)
In subsection (3)(a), for the words from “he” to “guardianship” substitute—
 
 
“(i)
the patient be granted leave of absence;
 
 
(ii)
the patient be transferred to another hospital or into
 
 
guardianship; or
25
 
(iii)
the responsible after-care bodies make plans for the
 
 
provision of after-care services for the patient”.
 
 
(3)
After subsection (7) insert—
 
 
“(8)
In this section—
 
 
“after-care services” means after-care services provided or
30
 
arranged under section 117;
 
 
“the responsible after-care bodies” , in relation to a patient, means
 
 
the bodies that will have the duty under section 117 to provide
 
 
after-care services for the patient.”
 
47
After-care services
35
 
(1)
Section 117 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (after-care) is amended as follows.
 

Page 59

 
(2)
In subsection (2) , after “authority”, in the second place it occurs, insert “jointly
 
 
give notice in writing to the person stating that they”.
 
 
(3)
After subsection (3) insert—
 
 
“(3A)
In applying subsection (3) for the purpose of determining the local
 
 
social services authority in relation to a person—
5
 
(a)
section 105 (6) of the Children Act 1989 —
 
 
(i)
applies for the purpose of determining the person’s
 
 
ordinary residence at any time when they were aged
 
 
under 18, and
 
 
(ii)
in its application for that purpose, is to be read as if
10
 
there were inserted, after paragraph (c)—
 
 
“(d)
while the child is being provided with
 
 
accommodation under section 117 of the
 
 
Mental Health Act 1983 ; or
 
 
(e)
while the child is being provided
15
 
with accommodation under any of the
 
 
following—
 
 
the National Health Service Act
 
 
2006 ;
 
 
the National Health Service (Wales)
20
 
Act 2006 ;
 
 
the National Health Service
 
 
(Scotland) Act 1978 ;
 
 
the Health and Personal Social
 
 
Services (Northern Ireland) Order
25
 
1972 (S.I. 1972/1265 (N.I. 14));
 
 
the Health and Social Care
 
 
(Reform) Act (Northern Ireland)
 
 
2009 ; or
 
 
(f)
which is referred to in section 194(6) of
30
 
the Social Services and Well-being
 
 
(Wales) Act 2014 (anaw‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌ 4).”;
 
 
(b)
the following provisions apply for the purpose of determining
 
 
the person’s ordinary residence at any time when they were
 
 
aged 18 or over—
35
 
(i)
section 39 (1) to (6) of, and paragraphs 1 (1) , 2 (1) and (2)
 
 
and 8 of Schedule 1 to, the Care Act 2014 ;
 
 
(ii)
section 194(1) to (3) of the Social Services and Well-being
 
 
(Wales) Act 2014 (anaw‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌‌ 4).
 

Page 60

Miscellaneous

 
48
Tribunal powers in guardianship cases: burden of proof
 
 
In section 72(4) of the Mental Health Act 1983 (powers of tribunals in relation
 
 
to guardianship cases)—
 
 
(a)
in the opening words, after “it is” insert “not”;
5
 
(b)
in paragraph (a) omit “not”;
 
 
(c)
in paragraph (b) omit “not”.
 
49
Removal of police stations and prisons as places of safety
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 55 (interpretation of Part 3), in subsection (1) , for the definition of
10
 
“place of safety” substitute—
 
 
““place of safety” —
 
 
(a)
in relation to a person who is not a child or young person,
 
 
means any hospital the managers of which are willing
 
 
temporarily to receive that person;
15
 
(b)
in relation to a child or young person, has the same meaning
 
 
as in the Children and Young Persons Act 1933 except that it
 
 
does not include a police station;”.
 
 
(3)
The amendment made by subsection (2) does not apply in relation to any
 
 
directions given under sections 35 (4) , 36 (3) , 37 (4) , 38 (4) or 45A (5) before the
20
 
coming into force of that subsection .
 
 
(4)
In section 135 (warrant to search for and remove patients)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (6) omit “a police station,”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (7) , before paragraph (a) insert—
 
 
“(za)
a police station may not be regarded as a suitable
25
 
place;”;
 
 
(c)
omit subsection (8) .
 
 
(5)
In section 136 (removal etc of mentally disordered persons without a warrant)
 
 
omit subsection (5) .
 
 
(6)
Omit section 136A (use of police stations as places of safety).
30
 
(7)
In section 136B (extension of detention) omit subsection (3) .
 
50
Removal of patients by authorised persons
 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 135 (warrant to search for and remove patients)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1) , after “constable”, insert “or authorised person”;
35
 
(b)
in subsection (1A) , after “constable”, insert “or authorised person”;
 

Page 61

 
(c)
in closing words of subsection (2) , after “constable”, insert “or
 
 
authorised person”;
 
 
(d)
in subsection (3ZA) (a) (ii) , after “constable”, insert “or authorised
 
 
person”;
 
 
(e)
in subsection (7) (b) , after “constable”, insert “or authorised person”.
5
 
(3)
In section 136 (removal etc of mentally disordered persons without a
 
 
warrant)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1) , after each instance of “constable”, insert “or
 
 
authorised person”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (1A) , after “constable”, insert “or authorised person”;
10
 
(c)
in subsection (1B) , after “constable”, insert “or authorised person”;
 
 
(d)
in subsection (2A) (a) (ii) , after “constable”, insert “or authorised person”.
 
51
Remand for a person’s own protection etc
 
 
(1)
Schedule 1 to the Bail Act 1976 (persons entitled to bail: supplementary
 
 
provisions) is amended as follows.
15
 
(2)
In Part 1 of that Schedule (defendants accused or convicted of imprisonable
 
 
offences), for paragraph 3 substitute—
 
 
“3
(1)
The defendant need not be granted bail if—
 
 
(a)
the defendant has attained the age of 18, and
 
 
(b)
the court is satisfied, otherwise than by reason only of
20
 
concerns about the defendant’s mental health, that the
 
 
defendant should be kept in custody for their own protection.
 
 
(2)
The defendant need not be granted bail if—
 
 
(a)
the defendant is a child or young person, and
 
 
(b)
the court is satisfied that the defendant should be kept in
25
 
custody for their own welfare.”
 
 
(3)
In Part 1A of that Schedule (defendants accused or convicted of imprisonable
 
 
offences to which Part 1 does not apply), for paragraph 5 substitute—
 
 
“5
(1)
The defendant need not be granted bail if—
 
 
(a)
the defendant has attained the age of 18, and
30
 
(b)
the court is satisfied, otherwise than by reason only of
 
 
concerns about the defendant’s mental health, that the
 
 
defendant should be kept in custody for their own protection.
 
 
(2)
The defendant need not be granted bail if—
 
 
(a)
the defendant is a child or young person, and
35
 
(b)
the court is satisfied that the defendant should be kept in
 
 
custody for their own welfare.”
 
 
(4)
In Part 2 of that Schedule (defendants accused or convicted of
 
 
non-imprisonable offences), for paragraph 3 substitute—
 
 
“3
(1)
The defendant need not be granted bail if—
40
 
(a)
the defendant has attained the age of 18, and
 

Page 62

 
(b)
the court is satisfied, otherwise than by reason only of
 
 
concerns about the defendant’s mental health, that the
 
 
defendant should be kept in custody for their own protection.
 
 
(2)
The defendant need not be granted bail if—
 
 
(a)
the defendant is a child or young person, and
5
 
(b)
the court is satisfied that the defendant should be kept in
 
 
custody for their own welfare.”
 
 
(5)
The amendments made by this section apply in relation to any person who
 
 
is before a court after the coming into force of this section.
 
 
52
Removal of interim remand patients to and from Channel Islands or Isle of
10

Man

 
 
(1)
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In section 83 (removal of patients to Channel Islands or Isle of Man) omit
 
 
“(otherwise than by virtue of section 35, 36 or 38 above)”.
 
 
(3)
In section 85 (patients removed from Channel Islands or Isle of Man)—
15
 
(a)
in subsection (1) omit “(other than section 35, 36 or 38 above)”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (2), after “shall” insert “(subject to subsection (2A))”;
 
 
(c)
after subsection (2) insert—
 
 
“(2A)
In relation to a patient treated by virtue of subsection (2) as
 
 
liable to be detained under section 35, 36 or 38, this Act is to
20
 
be read with the modifications set out in Schedule A2.”
 
 
(4)
In section 91 (general provisions as to patients removed from England and
 
 
Wales), in subsection (1) omit “(other than section 35, 36 or 38 above)”.
 
 
(5)
After Schedule A1 (inserted by Schedule 2 to this Act) insert—
 
 
“Schedule A2
Section 85 (2A)
25
 
Interim remand patients from Channel Islands or Isle of Man:
 
 
modifications of this Act
 
 
Modifications of section 35
 
 
1
(1)
In relation to a patient who is treated by virtue of section 85(2) as
 
 
admitted to hospital in pursuance of an order made under section
30
 
35(1) (remand to hospital for report on accused’s mental condition),
 
 
section 35 applies with the modifications set out in this paragraph.
 
 
(2)
Subsection (2) is to be omitted.
 
 
(3)
References to an “accused person” are to be read as references to
 
 
the patient referred to in sub-paragraph (1).
35
 
(4)
References to “the court” are to be read as references to whichever
 
 
of—
 
 
(i)
the Crown Court, and
 
 
(ii)
a magistrates’ court,
 

Page 63

 
has functions most closely corresponding to those of the court under
 
 
whose order or direction the patient was liable to be detained
 
 
immediately before the patient’s removal to England and Wales.
 
 
(5)
In subsection (5) for the words from the beginning to “him” there
 
 
is to be substituted “The court may further remand an accused
5
 
person”.
 
 
(6)
After subsection (5) there is to be inserted—
 
 
“(5A)
The court may also further remand an accused person if it
 
 
has been notified by the Secretary of State that—
 
 
(a)
the person is the subject of criminal proceedings in
10
 
any of the Channel Islands or the Isle of Man, and
 
 
(b)
the Secretary of State is considering exercising the
 
 
power in section 83 in relation to the accused person.”
 
 
(7)
For subsection (7) there is to be substituted—
 
 
“(7)
A remand under this section has effect for 28 days.
15
 
(7A)
Further periods of remand by the court may not be for more
 
 
than 28 days at a time and an accused person may not be
 
 
remanded for more than 12 weeks in all.
 
 
(7B)
Where the court further remands an accused person it must
 
 
notify the Secretary of State of the period for which the
20
 
person is further remanded.
 
 
(7C)
The court may at any time recommend to the Secretary of
 
 
State that the accused person be returned to the island from
 
 
which the person was removed.”
 
 
(8)
In subsection (8), for “his remand to be terminated under subsection
25
 
(7)” there is to be substituted “a recommendation to be made under
 
 
subsection (7C)”.
 
 
(9)
In subsection (10), the words from “that remanded him” to the end
 
 
are to be omitted.
 
 
Modifications of section 36
30
 
2
(1)
Section 36 (remand of accused person to hospital for treatment)
 
 
applies—
 
 
(a)
in relation to a patient who is treated by virtue of section
 
 
85(2) as admitted to hospital in pursuance of an order made
 
 
under section 35(1) (remand to hospital for report on
35
 
accused’s mental condition), with the modifications set out
 
 
in sub-paragraphs (2) to (8) ;
 
 
(b)
in relation to a patient who—
 
 
(i)
was treated by virtue of section 85(2) as admitted to
 
 
hospital in pursuance of an order made under section
40
 
35(1), and
 

Page 64

 
(ii)
is subsequently remanded under section 36(1) as it
 
 
applies by virtue of paragraph (a) ,
 
 
with the modifications set out in sub-paragraphs (3) to (8) ;
 
 
(c)
in relation to a patient who is treated by virtue of section
 
 
85(2) as admitted to hospital in pursuance of an order made
5
 
under section 36(1), with the modifications set out in
 
 
sub-paragraphs (3) to (8) .
 
 
(2)
In subsection (1), in the words before paragaph (a), for “, instead
 
 
of remanding an accused person in custody, remand him” there is
 
 
to be substituted “remand an accused person”.
10
 
(3)
Subsection (2) is to be omitted.
 
 
(4)
References to an “accused person” are to be read as references to
 
 
the patient referred to in sub-paragraph (1) (a) , (b) or (c) .
 
 
(5)
In subsection (4), for “warranted” there is to be substituted
 
 
“warranted—
15
 
“(a)
because the court has been notified by the Secretary
 
 
of State that—
 
 
(i)
the person is the subject of criminal
 
 
proceedings in any of the Channel Islands or
 
 
the Isle of Man, and
20
 
(ii)
the Secretary of State is considering exercising
 
 
the power in section 83 in relation to the
 
 
accused person, or
 
 
(b)
for other reasons”.
 
 
(6)
For subsection (6) there is to be substituted—
25
 
“(6)
A remand under this section has effect for 28 days.
 
 
(6A)
Further periods of remand by the court may not be for more
 
 
than 28 days at a time and an accused person may not be
 
 
remanded for more than 12 weeks in all.
 
 
(6B)
Where the court further remands an accused person it must
30
 
notify the Secretary of State of the period for which the
 
 
person is further remanded.
 
 
(6C)
The court may at any time recommend to the Secretary of
 
 
State that the accused person be returned to the island from
 
 
which the person was removed.”
35
 
(7)
In subsection (7) for “his remand to be terminated under subsection
 
 
(6)” there is to be substituted “a recommendation to be made under
 
 
subsection (6C) ”;
 
 
(8)
Subsection (8) is to be read as applying subsection (10) of section
 
 
35 as modified by paragraph 1 (9) of this Schedule.
40

Page 65

 
Modifications of section 38
 
 
3
(1)
In relation to a patient who is treated by virtue of section 85(2) as
 
 
admitted to hospital in pursuance of an order made under section
 
 
38(1) (interim hospital orders), section 38 applies with the
 
 
modifications set out in this paragraph.
5
 
(2)
Subsection (2) is to be omitted.
 
 
(3)
References to “the court” are to be read as references to whichever
 
 
of—
 
 
(i)
the Crown Court, and
 
 
(ii)
a magistrates’ court,
10
 
has functions most closely corresponding to those of the court under
 
 
whose order or direction the patient was liable to be detained
 
 
immediately before the patient’s removal to England and Wales.
 
 
(4)
In subsection (5)—
 
 
(a)
in paragraph (b), for “warranted” there is to be substituted
15
 
“warranted—
 
 
“(i)
because the court has been notified by
 
 
the Secretary of State that—
 
 
(A)
the offender is the subject of
 
 
criminal proceedings in any
20
 
of the Channel Islands or the
 
 
Isle of Man, and
 
 
(B)
the Secretary of State is
 
 
considering exercising the
 
 
power in section 83 in
25
 
relation to the offender, or
 
 
(ii)
for other reasons”;
 
 
(b)
in the words after paragraph (b), the words from “and” to
 
 
the end are to be omitted.
 
 
(5)
After subsection (5) there is to be inserted—
30
 
“(5A)
Where the court renews the interim hospital order it must
 
 
notify the Secretary of State of the period for which it is
 
 
renewed.
 
 
(5B)
The court may at any time recommend to the Secretary of
 
 
State that the offender be returned to the island from which
35
 
the offender was removed.”
 
 
(6)
In subsection (7), the words from “that made the order” to the end
 
 
are to be omitted.
 
 
Modification of section 83
 
 
4
In relation to a patient referred to in paragraph 1 (1) , 2 (1) or 3 (1) , in
40
 
section 83 (removal of patients to Channel Islands or Isle of Man),
 

Page 66

 
for “in the interests of the patient” there is to be substituted
 
 
“appropriate”.
 
53
Data protection
 
 
After section 142B of the Mental Health Act 1983 insert—
 
“142C
Data protection
5
 
(1)
This section applies to a duty or power to process information that is
 
 
imposed or conferred by or under any provision of this Act.
 
 
(2)
A duty or power to which this section applies does not require or
 
 
authorise the processing of information which would contravene the
 
 
data protection legislation (but the duty or power is to be taken into
10
 
account in determining whether the processing would contravene that
 
 
legislation).
 
 
(3)
In this section “the data protection legislation” has the same meaning
 
 
as in the Data Protection Act 2018 (see section 3 of that Act).”
 
54
Review of duty to notify incidents
15
 
(1)
The Secretary of State must carry out a review into—
 
 
(a)
whether regulation 18 of the Care Quality Commission (Registration)
 
 
Regulations 2009 (S.I.2009/3112) (duty to notify incidents) ought to
 
 
be extended to require a notification to be given in any other cases in
 
 
which a person under the age of 18 is admitted to a hospital or
20
 
registered establishment for medical treatment for, or assessment in
 
 
relation to, mental disorder, and
 
 
(b)
whether the time period mentioned in regulation 18(2)(h) of those
 
 
Regulations remains appropriate.
 
 
(2)
The Secretary of State must prepare and publish a report setting out the
25
 
conclusions of the review.
 
 
(3)
The Secretary of State must lay a copy of the report before Parliament.
 
 
(4)
The report must be laid and published before the end of the period of 2 years
 
 
beginning with the day on which this Act is passed.
 
 
(5)
In this section the following expressions have the meaning given by section
30
 
145 of the Mental Health Act 1983—
 
 
“hospital” ;
 
 
“medical treatment” ;
 
 
“mental disorder” ;
 
 
“registered establishment” .
35

Page 67

General

 
55
Power of Secretary of State to make consequential provision
 
 
(1)
The Secretary of State may by regulations made by statutory instrument make
 
 
provision that is consequential on this Act.
 
 
(2)
Regulations under this section may amend, repeal or revoke provision made
5
 
by or under primary legislation passed—
 
 
(a)
before this Act, or
 
 
(b)
later in the same session of Parliament as this Act.
 
 
(3)
In this section “primary legislation” means—
 
 
(a)
an Act, or
10
 
(b)
an Act or Measure of Senedd Cymru.
 
 
(4)
A statutory instrument containing (alone or with other provision) regulations
 
 
under this section that amend or repeal provision made by primary legislation
 
 
may not be made unless a draft of the instrument has been laid before, and
 
 
approved by a resolution of, each House of Parliament.
15
 
(5)
Any other statutory instrument containing regulations under this section is
 
 
subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of
 
 
Parliament.
 
56
Power of Welsh Ministers to make consequential provision
 
 
(1)
The Welsh Ministers may by regulations made by statutory instrument make
20
 
provision that is consequential on this Act.
 
 
(2)
The only provision that may be made by virtue of this section is provision
 
 
that would be within the legislative competence of Senedd Cymru if contained
 
 
in an Act of the Senedd.
 
 
(3)
Regulations under this section may amend, repeal or revoke provision made
25
 
by or under primary legislation passed—
 
 
(a)
before this Act, or
 
 
(b)
later in the same session of Parliament as this Act.
 
 
(4)
In this section “primary legislation” means—
 
 
(a)
an Act, or
30
 
(b)
an Act or Measure of Senedd Cymru.
 
 
(5)
A statutory instrument containing (alone or with other provision) regulations
 
 
under this section that amend or repeal provision made by primary legislation
 
 
may not be made unless a draft of the instrument has been laid before, and
 
 
approved by a resolution of, Senedd Cymru.
35
 
(6)
Any other statutory instrument containing regulations under this section is
 
 
subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of Senedd Cymru.
 

Page 68

57
Extent
 
 
(1)
An amendment or repeal made by this Act has the same extent as the
 
 
provision amended or repealed.
 
 
(2)
This section, section 55 and sections 58 and 59 extend to England and Wales,
 
 
Scotland and Northern Ireland.
5
58
Commencement
 
 
(1)
Sections 30 (2) , 32 , 36 , 37 (1) and (3) (b) , 39 and 40 come into force at the end
 
 
of the period of two months beginning with the day on which this Act is
 
 
passed.
 
 
(2)
Sections 55 to 57 , this section and section 59 come into force on the day on
10
 
which this Act is passed.
 
 
(3)
Except as mentioned in subsections (1) and (2) , this Act comes into force on
 
 
such day as the Secretary of State may by regulations appoint.
 
 
(4)
Regulations under this section are to be made by statutory instrument.
 
 
(5)
Different days may be appointed under subsection (3) for different purposes.
15
 
(6)
The Secretary of State may by regulations make transitional or saving provision
 
 
in connection with the coming into force of any provision of this Act.
 
 
(7)
The power to make regulations under subsection (6) includes power to make
 
 
different provision for different purposes.
 
 
(8)
Transitional and savings made by regulations under subsection (6) are
20
 
additional, and without prejudice, to those made by any other provision of
 
 
this Act.
 
59
Short title
 
 
(1)
This Act may be cited as the Mental Health Act 2025.
 
 
(2)
Nothing in this Act shall impose any charge on the people or on public
25
 
funds, or vary the amount or incidence of or otherwise alter any such charge
 
 
in any manner, or affect the assessment, levying, administration or
 
 
application of any money raised by any such charge.
 

Page 69

Schedules

 
 
Schedule 1
section 3 (4)
 

Application of the 1983 Act to autism and learning disability: amendments

 

and transitory provision

 

Amendments of Part 2 of the Mental Health Act 1983

5
 
1
Part 2 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (compulsory admission to hospital
 
 
and guardianship) is amended as follows.
 
 
2
In section 3 (admission for treatment), in subsection (2), for paragraph (a)
 
 
substitute—
 
 
“(a)
the patient is suffering from psychiatric disorder of a nature
10
 
or degree which makes it appropriate for the patient to
 
 
receive medical treatment in a hospital,”.
 
 
3
In section 7 (application for guardianship), in subsection (2), for paragraph
 
 
(a) substitute—
 
 
“(a)
the patient is suffering from—
15
 
(i)
psychiatric disorder,
 
 
(ii)
autism, or
 
 
(iii)
learning disability which has serious behavioural
 
 
consequences,
 
 
of a nature or degree which warrants the patient’s reception
20
 
into guardianship under this section, and”.
 
 
4
(1)
Section 17A (community treatment orders) is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In subsection (5), for paragraph (a) substitute—
 
 
“(a)
the patient is suffering from psychiatric disorder of a nature
 
 
or degree which makes it appropriate for the patient to
25
 
receive medical treatment,”.
 
 
(3)
In subsection (6), for “mental”, in both places it occurs, substitute
 
 
“psychiatric”.
 
 
5
In section 17E (power to recall community patient to hospital), in subsection
 
 
(1)(a), for “mental” substitute “psychiatric”.
30
 
6
(1)
Section 20 (renewal of authority in relation to admission for treatment and
 
 
guardianship) is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In subsection (4) (admission for treatment), for paragraph (a) substitute—
 
 
“(a)
the patient is suffering from psychiatric disorder of a nature
 
 
or degree which makes it appropriate for the patient to
35
 
receive medical treatment in a hospital,”.
 

Page 70

 
(3)
In subsection (7) (guardianship), for paragraph (a) substitute—
 
 
“(a)
the patient is suffering from—
 
 
(i)
psychiatric disorder,
 
 
(ii)
autism, or
 
 
(iii)
learning disability which has serious behavioural
5
 
consequences,
 
 
of a nature or degree which warrants the patient’s reception
 
 
into guardianship, and”.
 

Amendments of Part 3 of the Mental Health Act 1983

 
 
7
Part 3 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (patients concerned in criminal
10
 
proceedings or under sentence) is amended as follows.
 
 
8
Before the italic heading before section 35 insert—
 

“Application of Part 3: “relevant disorder”

 
34A
Application of Part 3: “relevant disorder”
 
 
In this Part “relevant disorder” means—
15
 
(a)
psychiatric disorder,
 
 
(b)
autism, or
 
 
(c)
learning disability which has serious behavioural
 
 
consequences.”
 
 
9
In the following places, for “mental” substitute “relevant”—
20
 
section 35 (3) (a) (remand to hospital for report);
 
 
section 36 (1) (a) (remand to hospital for treatment);
 
 
section 37 (2) (a) (orders for hospital admission or guardianship), in
 
 
each place it occurs;
 
 
section 38 (1) (a) and (b) (interim hospital orders);
25
 
section 45A (2) (a) and (b) (conditions on hospital admission);
 
 
section 47 (1) (a) and (b) (removal to hospital of prisoners under
 
 
sentence, etc);
 
 
section 48 (1) (a) (removal to hospital of other prisoners);
 
 
section 50 (1) (sentenced prisoners: power to remit or release);
30
 
section 51 (3) (a) , (4)(a) and (6)(a) (detainees: powers to remit or release);
 
 
section 52 (5) (a) (accused persons: magistrates’ court’s power);
 
 
section 53 (2) (a) (civil prisoners and immigration detainees).
 
 
10
In section 55 (interpretation)—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (1), at the appropriate place insert—
35
 
““relevant disorder” has the meaning given by section 34A ;”;
 

Page 71

 
(b)
in subsection (4), after “69(1)” insert “or 72 (1ZA) ”.
 
 
11
(1)
In Schedule 1 (application of certain provisions to patients subject to hospital
 
 
and guardianship orders), Part 1 (patients not subject to special restrictions)
 
 
is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In paragraph 1—
5
 
(a)
for “to 17C, 17E, 17F,” substitute “, 17B, 17C,”;
 
 
(b)
omit “20A,”.
 
 
(3)
In paragraph 2—
 
 
(a)
for “17D, 17G,” substitute “17A, 17D to 17G,”;
 
 
(b)
for “2A” substitute “2ZA”;
10
 
(c)
omit “20,”.
 
 
(4)
After paragraph 2 insert—
 
 
“2ZA
In section 17A—
 
 
(a)
in subsection (5)(a), for “psychiatric disorder” there is to
 
 
be substituted “relevant disorder (within the meaning
15
 
given by section 34A )”;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (6), for “psychiatric disorder”, in both places
 
 
it occurs, there is to be substituted “relevant disorder
 
 
(within the meaning given by section 34A )”.
 
 
2ZB
In section 17E, in subsection (1)(a), for “psychiatric disorder” there
20
 
is to be substituted “relevant disorder (within the meaning given
 
 
by section 34A )”.”
 
 
(5)
After paragraph 2A insert—
 
 
“2AA
In section 17F, after subsection (4) there is to be inserted—
 
 
“(4A)
Section 3(2) as it applies for the purposes of subsection
25
 
(4)(a) is to be read as if the reference to psychiatric
 
 
disorder were a reference to relevant disorder (within the
 
 
meaning given by section 34A ).”
 
 
(6)
In paragraph 5B (as inserted by section 29 of this Act), after sub-paragraph
 
 
(2) insert—
30
 
“(3)
In section 20(4)(a), for “psychiatric disorder” there is to be
 
 
substituted “relevant disorder (within the meaning given by
 
 
section 34A )”.”
 
 
(7)
In paragraph 5C (as inserted by section 29 of this Act), after sub-paragraph
 
 
(3) insert—
35
 
“(4)
In section 20(4)(a), for “psychiatric disorder” there is to be
 
 
substituted “relevant disorder (within the meaning given by
 
 
section 34A )”.”
 

Page 72

 
(8)
In paragraph 5D (as inserted by section 29 of this Act), after sub-paragraph
 
 
(2) insert—
 
 
“(3)
In section 20(4)(a), for “psychiatric disorder” there is to be
 
 
substituted “relevant disorder (within the meaning given by
 
 
section 34A )”.”
5
 
(9)
In paragraph 6 (as substituted by section 29 of this Act), after sub-paragraph
 
 
(3) insert—
 
 
“(4)
In section 20(4)(a), for “psychiatric disorder” there is to be
 
 
substituted “relevant disorder (within the meaning given by
 
 
section 34A )”.”
10
 
(10)
After paragraph 6 insert—
 
 
“6ZA
In section 20A, after subsection (10) there is to be inserted—
 
 
“(11)
Section 17A(5) as it applies for the purposes of subsection
 
 
(4)(b) is to be read as if the reference to psychiatric
 
 
disorder were a reference to relevant disorder (within the
15
 
meaning given by section 34A ).”
 

Amendments of Part 4 of the Mental Health Act 1983

 
 
12
Part 4 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (consent to treatment) is amended as
 
 
follows.
 
 
13
In section 56 (patients to whom Part 4 applies)—
20
 
(a)
for the heading substitute “Application of Part 4 : patients and
 
 
disorders”;
 
 
(b)
after subsection (5) insert—
 
 
“(6)
In this Part “relevant disorder”—
 
 
(a)
in relation to—
25
 
(i)
a patient falling within subsection (3) where
 
 
the patient is liable to be detained by virtue
 
 
of section 3,
 
 
(ii)
a patient falling within subsection (3), where
 
 
the patient is liable to be detained by virtue
30
 
of section 20(4), otherwise than as that
 
 
provision applies by virtue of Part 1 of
 
 
Schedule 1, or
 
 
(iii)
a patient falling within subsection (4),
 
 
means psychiatric disorder;
35
 
(b)
in relation to any other patient, means mental
 
 
disorder.”
 
 
14
In the following places, for “mental”, substitute “relevant”—
 
 
section 58(1)(b) (administration of medicine requiring consent or a
 
 
second opinion);
40

Page 73

 
section 63 (treatment not requiring consent).
 

Amendments of Part 4A of the Mental Health Act 1983

 
 
15
In Part 4A of the Mental Health Act 1983 (treatment of community patients
 
 
not recalled to hospital), for section 64A substitute—
 
“64A
Meaning of “relevant treatment”
5
 
(1)
In this Part of this Act “relevant treatment”—
 
 
(a)
in relation to a Part 3 community patient, means medical
 
 
treatment which—
 
 
(i)
is for the relevant disorder from which the patient is
 
 
suffering, and
10
 
(ii)
is not a form of treatment to which section 57 applies,
 
 
and
 
 
(b)
in relation to any other community patient, means medical
 
 
treatment which—
 
 
(i)
is for the psychiatric disorder from which the patient
15
 
is suffering, and
 
 
(ii)
is not a form of treatment to which section 57 applies.
 
 
(2)
In subsection (1)(a)—
 
 
“Part 3 community patient” means a person who is a
 
 
community patient by virtue of a community treatment order
20
 
under section 17A as applied by Part 1 of Schedule 1;
 
 
“relevant disorder” has the meaning given by section 34A .”
 

Amendments of Part 5 of the Mental Health Act 1983

 
 
16
Part 5 of the Mental Health Act 1983 (tribunals) is amended as follows.
 
 
17
(1)
Section 72 (grounds for discharge by tribunal) is amended as follows.
25
 
(2)
After subsection (1) insert—
 
 
“(1ZA)
In relation to a patient admitted to hospital in pursuance of a
 
 
hospital order (see section 55(4)), section 20(4) is to be read, for the
 
 
purposes of subsection (1)(b), as if the reference to psychiatric
 
 
disorder were a reference to relevant disorder (within the meaning
30
 
given by section 34A ).”
 
 
(3)
In subsection (1A), for “mental”, in both places it occurs, substitute
 
 
“psychiatric”.
 
 
(4)
After subsection (1A) insert—
 
 
“(1B)
In relation to a person who is a community patient by virtue of a
35
 
community treatment order under section 17A as applied by Part
 
 
1 of Schedule 1—
 
 
(a)
for the purposes of subsection (1)(c), section 17A(5) is to be
 
 
read as if the reference to psychiatric disorder were a
 

Page 74

 
reference to relevant disorder (within the meaning given by
 
 
section 34A ), and
 
 
(b)
subsection (1A) is to be read as if the references to psychiatric
 
 
disorder were references to relevant disorder (within the
 
 
meaning given by section 34A ).”
5
 
(5)
In subsection (4) (guardianship), in paragraph (a), for “mental disorder”
 
 
substitute—
 
 
“(i)
psychiatric disorder,
 
 
(ii)
autism, or
 
 
(iii)
learning disability which has serious behavioural
10
 
consequences”.
 
 
18
In section 73 (power to discharge restricted patients), after subsection (8)
 
 
insert—
 
 
“(9)
Subsection (4) of section 20 is to be read, for the purposes of this
 
 
section, as if the reference to psychiatric disorder in paragraph (a)
15
 
of that subsection were a reference to relevant disorder (within the
 
 
meaning given by section 34A ).”
 
 
19
In section 74 (restricted patients subject to restriction directions), in
 
 
subsection (6), for “(8)” substitute “(9)”.
 

Transitory modifications of the Mental Health Act 1983

20
 
20
Pending the coming into force of section 6 (4) (b) of this Act, section 20A(6)(a)
 
 
of the Mental Health Act 1983 is to be read as if—
 
 
(a)
in relation to a patient admitted to hospital in pursuance of a
 
 
hospital order (read in accordance with section 55(4) of the Mental
 
 
Health Act 1983), as if for “mental” there were substituted “relevant”;
25
 
(b)
in relation to any other patient, for “mental” there were substituted
 
 
“psychiatric”.
 
 
21
(1)
Pending the coming into force of section 7 (2) of this Act, section 72(1)(b)
 
 
and (c) and (1A) of the Mental Health Act 1983 are to be read—
 
 
(a)
in relation to a patient admitted to hospital in pursuance of a
30
 
hospital order (read in accordance with section 55(4) of the Mental
 
 
Health Act 1983) or a Part 3 community patient, as if, for “mental”,
 
 
in each place it occurs, there were substituted “relevant”;
 
 
(b)
in relation to any other patient as if for “mental”, in each place it
 
 
occurs, there were substituted “psychiatric”.
35
 
(2)
In sub-paragraph (1)(a) “Part 3 community patient” means a person who
 
 
is a community patient by virtue of a community treatment order under
 
 
section 17A as applied by Part 1 of Schedule 1 to the Mental Health Act
 
 
1983.
 
 
22
Pending the coming into force of section 7 (3) of this Act, section 72(1)(b)
40
 
of the Mental Health Act 1983 is to be read, for the purposes of section 73
 
 
of that Act, as modified by paragraph 21 (1) (a) of this Schedule.
 

Page 75

 
23
Pending the coming into force of section 8 (8) of this Act, section 64(3) of
 
 
the Mental Health Act 1983 is to be read as if for “mental” there were
 
 
substituted “relevant”.
 
 
24
Pending the coming into force of section 13 (3) (b) of this Act, section 58(1)
 
 
of the Mental Health Act 1983 is to be read as if, in the words before
5
 
paragraph (a), for “mental”, there were substituted “relevant”.
 
 
25
Pending the coming into force of section 29 (5) (d) and (e) of this Act, section
 
 
20 of the Mental Health Act 1983 is to be read as if for “psychiatric” there
 
 
were substituted “relevant”.
 
 
Schedule 2
Section 24
10

Nominated persons

 

Part 1

 

Appointment etc

 
 
1
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
2
Before section 31 and the italic heading before that section insert—
15

“Nominated persons: appointment and removal

 
30A
Nominated person
 
 
Schedule A1 —
 
 
(a)
confers power to appoint a nominated person for a patient
 
 
for the purposes of this Act, and
20
 
(b)
makes provision about the duration of an appointment of a
 
 
nominated person.
 
30B
Power of court to terminate appointment of nominated person
 
 
(1)
The county court may, on an application made in accordance with
 
 
the provisions of this section, make an order terminating the
25
 
appointment of a nominated person for a patient.
 
 
(2)
An order under this section may be made on the application of—
 
 
(a)
the patient,
 
 
(b)
an approved mental health professional, or
 
 
(c)
any person engaged in caring for the patient or interested
30
 
in the patient’s welfare.
 
 
(3)
An application for an order under this section may only be made
 
 
on the grounds that—
 

Page 76

 
(a)
the nominated person unreasonably objects to the making
 
 
of an application for admission for treatment or a
 
 
guardianship application in respect of the patient;
 
 
(b)
the nominated person has, without due regard to the welfare
 
 
of the patient or the interests of the public, exercised the
5
 
power to discharge the patient under this Part of this Act
 
 
or is likely to do so;
 
 
(c)
the nominated person unreasonably objects to the making
 
 
of a community treatment order in respect of the patient;
 
 
(d)
the patient has done anything which is clearly inconsistent
10
 
with the nominated person remaining the patient’s
 
 
nominated person;
 
 
(e)
the nominated person lacks the capacity or competence to
 
 
act as a nominated person;
 
 
(f)
the nominated person is otherwise not a suitable person to
15
 
act as a nominated person.
 
 
(4)
If, immediately before the expiry of the period for which a patient
 
 
is liable to be detained by virtue of an application for admission
 
 
for assessment, an application under this section, which is an
 
 
application made on the ground specified in subsection (3) (a) or
20
 
(b) , is pending in respect of the patient, that period is extended—
 
 
(a)
in any case, until the application under this section has been
 
 
finally disposed of, and
 
 
(b)
if an order is made in pursuance of the application under
 
 
this section, for a further period of seven days.
25
 
(5)
For the purposes of subsection (4) —
 
 
(a)
an application under this section is “pending” until it is
 
 
finally disposed of, and
 
 
(b)
an application under this section is “finally disposed of”—
 
 
(i)
when the time allowed for appealing against court’s
30
 
decision expires without an appeal being brought, or
 
 
(ii)
where an appeal is brought within that time, when
 
 
the appeal has been heard or withdrawn.
 
 
(6)
Where an order under this section terminates the appointment of
 
 
a nominated person for a patient, the person is disqualified from
35
 
being re-appointed for the period specified by the court in the order.
 
 
(7)
In this section “patient” includes any person by or for whom a
 
 
nominated person is appointed.”
 

Page 77

 
3
Before Schedule 1 insert—
 
 
“Schedule A1
Section 30A
 

Nominated person

 

Part 1

 

Appointment of nominated person by a patient

5

Right of patients etc to appoint nominated person

 
 
1
A person (the “patient”) may appoint another person to act as
 
 
their nominated person for the purposes of this Act.
 

Who can be appointed by a patient as a nominated person?

 
 
2
(1)
A person is eligible to be appointed as a nominated person under
10
 
this Part of this Schedule only if the person—
 
 
(a)
is an individual who meets the age requirement (see
 
 
sub-paragraph (2) ), and
 
 
(b)
is not disqualified by section 30B (6) (disqualification as a
 
 
result of court order terminating previous appointment
15
 
as a nominated person).
 
 
(2)
The table sets out the age requirement for a nominated person
 
 
who is an individual.
 
 
Where the patient is:
 
 
The nominated person must be:
 
 
16 or over
20
 
Under 16
 
 
18 or over
 

Appointment formalities

 
 
3
(1)
The appointment of a nominated person under this Part of this
 
 
Schedule is valid only if—
 
 
(a)
the person is eligible to be appointed as a nominated
25
 
person,
 
 
(b)
the appointment is made by an instrument in writing
 
 
signed by the patient in the presence of a health or care
 
 
professional or independent mental health advocate (“the
 
 
witness”),
30
 
(c)
the nominated person has signed a statement that they—
 
 
(i)
meet the age requirement (see paragraph 2 (2) ), and
 
 
(ii)
agree to act as the nominated person, and
 
 
(d)
the witness has signed a statement that—
 

Page 78

 
(i)
the instrument appointing the nominated person
 
 
was signed by the patient in the presence of the
 
 
witness,
 
 
(ii)
the witness has no reason to think that the patient
 
 
lacks capacity or competence to make the
5
 
appointment,
 
 
(iii)
the witness has no reason to think that the
 
 
nominated person lacks capacity or competence to
 
 
act as a nominated person,
 
 
(iv)
the witness has no reason to think that any fraud
10
 
or undue pressure has been used to induce the
 
 
patient to make the appointment, and
 
 
(v)
the witness has no reason to think that the
 
 
nominated person is unsuitable to act as a
 
 
nominated person.
15

Duration of appointment

 
 
4
The appointment of a nominated person under this Part of this
 
 
Schedule ceases to have effect if—
 
 
(a)
the nominated person dies;
 
 
(b)
the patient appoints a different nominated person;
20
 
(c)
the patient terminates the appointment under paragraph
 
 
5 ;
 
 
(d)
the nominated person resigns under paragraph 6 ;
 
 
(e)
the county court terminates the appointment under section
 
 
30B .
25

Termination of appointment by patient

 
 
5
(1)
The appointment of a nominated person under this Part of this
 
 
Schedule may be terminated by the patient giving the nominated
 
 
person written notice.
 
 
(2)
The notice must be—
30
 
(a)
signed by the patient in the presence of a health or care
 
 
professional or independent mental health advocate (“the
 
 
witness”), and
 
 
(b)
contain a statement, signed by the witness, that—
 
 
(i)
the notice was signed by the patient in the presence
35
 
of the witness,
 
 
(ii)
the witness has no reason to think that the patient
 
 
lacks capacity or competence to terminate the
 
 
appointment, and
 
 
(iii)
the witness has no reason to think that any fraud
40
 
or undue pressure has been used to induce the
 
 
patient to terminate the appointment.
 

Page 79

Resignation of nominated person

 
 
6
(1)
A nominated person appointed under this Part of this Schedule
 
 
may resign by giving written notice to the patient and at least
 
 
one of the persons mentioned in sub-paragraph (2).
 
 
(2)
The persons are—
5
 
(a)
an approved mental health professional;
 
 
(b)
the patient’s responsible clinician (if any);
 
 
(c)
in relation to a patient who is—
 
 
(i)
liable to be detained in pursuance of an application
 
 
for admission for assessment or treatment,
10
 
(ii)
the subject of an application for admission for
 
 
assessment or treatment, or
 
 
(iii)
a community patient,
 
 
the relevant managers;
 
 
(d)
in relation to a patient who is—
15
 
(i)
subject to guardianship in pursuance of a
 
 
guardianship application, or
 
 
(ii)
the subject of a guardianship application,
 
 
the relevant local social services authority.
 
 
(3)
The notice must be signed by the nominated person.
20

Part 2

 

Appointment of nominated person by an approved mental health

 

professional

 

Power of approved mental health professional to appoint nominated person

 
 
7
(1)
Where an approved mental health professional reasonably believes
25
 
that a relevant patient—
 
 
(a)
lacks capacity or is not competent to appoint a nominated
 
 
person, and
 
 
(b)
has not appointed a person under Part 1 of this Schedule
 
 
to act as their nominated person,
30
 
the professional may appoint a person to act as the patient’s
 
 
nominated person for the purposes of this Act.
 
 
(2)
In this Schedule “relevant patient” means a person—
 
 
(a)
who is liable to be detained in pursuance of an application
 
 
for admission for assessment or treatment,
35
 
(b)
who is the subject of an application for admission for
 
 
assessment or treatment,
 
 
(c)
in relation to whom an approved mental health
 
 
professional is considering making an application for
 
 
admission for assessment or treatment,
40

Page 80

 
(d)
who is a community patient,
 
 
(e)
who is subject to guardianship in pursuance of a
 
 
guardianship application,
 
 
(f)
who is the subject of a guardianship application, or
 
 
(g)
in relation to whom an approved mental health
5
 
professional is considering making a guardianship
 
 
application.
 

Who can be appointed by an approved mental health professional as a nominated

 

person?

 
 
8
A person is eligible to be appointed as a nominated person under
10
 
this Part of this Schedule only if the person—
 
 
(a)
is an individual who meets the age requirement (see
 
 
paragraph 2 (2) ) or is a local authority, and
 
 
(b)
is not disqualified by 30B (6) (disqualification as a result
 
 
of court order terminating previous appointment as a
15
 
nominated person).
 

Selection of nominated person

 
 
9
(1)
This paragraph applies where an approved mental health
 
 
professional is deciding who to appoint as a nominated person
 
 
for a relevant patient who is aged 18 or over.
20
 
(2)
If the relevant patient has a competent donee or deputy who is
 
 
willing to act as the nominated person, the approved mental
 
 
health professional must appoint the donee or deputy.
 
 
(3)
In any other case, the approved mental health professional must,
 
 
in deciding who to appoint, take into account the relevant
25
 
patient’s past and present wishes and feelings so far as reasonably
 
 
ascertainable.
 
 
(4)
In this paragraph—
 
 
(a)
“donee” means a donee of a lasting power of attorney
 
 
(within the meaning of section 9 of Mental Capacity Act
30
 
2005) created by the patient;
 
 
(b)
“deputy” means a deputy appointed for the patient by
 
 
the Court of Protection under section 16 of that Act;
 
 
(c)
a donee or deputy is “competent” if the scope of the
 
 
authority conferred on them as donee or deputy would
35
 
extend to taking decisions of the kind taken by a
 
 
nominated person.
 
 
10
(1)
This paragraph applies where an approved mental health
 
 
professional is deciding who to appoint as a nominated person
 
 
for a relevant patient who is aged 16 or 17.
40

Page 81

 
(2)
If a local authority has parental responsibility for the relevant
 
 
patient, the approved mental health professional must appoint
 
 
that local authority.
 
 
(3)
If no local authority has parental responsibility for the relevant
 
 
patient but the relevant patient has a competent deputy who is
5
 
willing to act as the nominated person, the approved mental
 
 
health professional must appoint the deputy.
 
 
(4)
In any case in which sub-paragraphs (2) and (3) do not identify
 
 
who is to be appointed, the approved mental health professional
 
 
must, in deciding who to appoint, take into account the relevant
10
 
patient’s past and present wishes and feelings so far as reasonably
 
 
ascertainable.
 
 
(5)
In this paragraph—
 
 
(a)
“deputy” means a deputy appointed for the patient by
 
 
the Court of Protection under section 16 of that Act;
15
 
(b)
a deputy is “competent” if the scope of the authority
 
 
conferred on them as donee or deputy would extend to
 
 
taking decisions of the kind taken by a nominated person.
 
 
11
(1)
This paragraph applies where an approved mental health
 
 
professional is deciding who to appoint as a nominated person
20
 
for a relevant patient who is aged under 16.
 
 
(2)
If a local authority has parental responsibility for the relevant
 
 
patient, the approved mental health professional must appoint
 
 
that local authority.
 
 
(3)
Where sub-paragraph (2) does not apply, the approved mental
25
 
health professional must appoint as a nominated person—
 
 
(a)
a guardian who has been appointed for the relevant
 
 
patient,
 
 
(b)
a person who is named in a child arrangements order, as
 
 
defined by section 8 of the Children Act 1989, as a person
30
 
with whom the relevant patient is to live, or
 
 
(c)
a person who has parental responsibility for the relevant
 
 
patient.
 
 
(4)
In this paragraph “guardian” includes a special guardian within
 
 
the meaning of the Children Act 1989 but does not include a
35
 
guardian under section 7 of that Act.
 
 
(5)
Where there is more than one person identified as a potential
 
 
nominated person in sub-paragraph (3) (a) , (b) or (c) then the
 
 
approved mental health professional must in deciding who to
 
 
appoint—
40
 
(a)
take into account the relevant patient’s past and present
 
 
wishes and feelings so far as reasonably ascertainable, or
 

Page 82

 
(b)
where it has not been possible to ascertain the relevant
 
 
patient’s past and present wishes, preference must be
 
 
given to the eldest person.
 
 
(6)
In any case in which sub-paragraphs (2) and [sub-paragraph
 
 
removed] do not identify who is to be appointed, the approved
5
 
mental health professional must, in deciding who to appoint, take
 
 
into account the relevant patient’s past and present wishes and
 
 
feelings so far as reasonably ascertainable.
 

Appointment formalities

 
 
12
The appointment of a nominated person by an approved mental
10
 
health professional is valid only if—
 
 
(a)
the person is eligible to be appointed as a nominated
 
 
person (see paragraph 8 ),
 
 
(b)
the person agrees to act as the nominated person, and
 
 
(c)
the appointment is made by an instrument in writing and
15
 
signed by the professional.
 

Notification of appointment

 
 
13
(1)
Where an approved mental health professional appoints a
 
 
nominated person under this Part of this Schedule, the
 
 
professional must—
20
 
(a)
if the appointment relates to a relevant patient falling
 
 
within paragraph 7 (2) (a) to (d) , notify the relevant
 
 
managers;
 
 
(b)
if the appointment relates to a relevant patient falling
 
 
within paragraph 7 (2) (e) to (g) , notify the relevant local
25
 
social services authority.
 
 
(2)
A person who is notified under sub-paragraph (1) of the
 
 
appointment of a nominated person must take such steps as the
 
 
person considers appropriate to inform the relevant patient of
 
 
the appointment.
30

Duration of appointment

 
 
14
The appointment of a nominated person under this Part of this
 
 
Schedule ceases to have effect if—
 
 
(a)
the nominated person dies;
 
 
(b)
an approved mental health professional appoints a
35
 
different nominated person for the relevant patient;
 
 
(c)
an approved mental health professional terminates the
 
 
appointment under paragraph 15 ;
 
 
(d)
the relevant patient terminates the appointment under
 
 
paragraph 16 ;
40
 
(e)
the nominated person resigns under paragraph 17 ;
 

Page 83

 
(f)
the county court terminates the appointment under section
 
 
30B ;
 
 
(g)
the relevant patient appoints a different nominated person
 
 
under Part 1 of this Schedule;
 
 
(h)
the person for whom the nominated person was appointed
5
 
ceases to be a relevant patient.
 

Termination of appointment by approved mental health professional

 
 
15
(1)
Where an approved mental health professional has appointed a
 
 
nominated person for a relevant patient, an approved mental
 
 
health professional may terminate the appointment by giving
10
 
written notice to the nominated person and the patient.
 
 
(2)
The appointment may only be terminated on the grounds that—
 
 
(a)
the person lacks capacity to exercise the functions of a
 
 
nominated person,
 
 
(b)
the person is otherwise not a suitable person to act as the
15
 
nominated person, or
 
 
(c)
the relevant patient has regained capacity or competence
 
 
to appoint a nominated person under Part 1 of this
 
 
Schedule.
 
 
(3)
Where an approved mental health professional terminates the
20
 
appointment of a nominated person under this Part of this
 
 
Schedule, the professional must—
 
 
(a)
if the appointment relates to a relevant patient falling
 
 
within paragraph 7 (2) (a) to (d) , notify the relevant
 
 
managers;
25
 
(b)
if the appointment relates to a relevant patient falling
 
 
within paragraph 7 (2) (e) to (g) , notify the relevant local
 
 
social services authority.
 

Termination of appointment by relevant patient

 
 
16
(1)
The appointment of a nominated person under this Part of this
30
 
Schedule may be terminated by the relevant patient giving the
 
 
nominated person written notice.
 
 
(2)
The notice must be—
 
 
(a)
signed by the relevant patient in the presence of a health
 
 
or care professional or independent mental health advocate
35
 
(“the witness”), and
 
 
(b)
contain a statement, signed by the witness, that—
 
 
(i)
the notice was signed by the patient in the presence
 
 
of the witness,
 
 
(ii)
the witness has no reason to think that the patient
40
 
lacks capacity or competence to terminate the
 
 
appointment, and
 

Page 84

 
(iii)
the witness has no reason to think that any fraud
 
 
or undue pressure has been used to induce the
 
 
patient to terminate the appointment.
 

Resignation of nominated person

 
 
17
(1)
A nominated person appointed by an approved mental health
5
 
professional may resign by giving written notice to the patient
 
 
and at least one of the persons mentioned in sub-paragraph (2).
 
 
(2)
The persons are—
 
 
(a)
an approved mental health professional;
 
 
(b)
the relevant patient’s responsible clinician (if any);
10
 
(c)
in relation to a relevant patient falling within paragraph
 
 
7 (2) (a) , (b) or (d) , the relevant managers;
 
 
(d)
in relation to a relevant patient falling within paragraph
 
 
7 (2) (e) or (f) , the relevant local social services authority.
 
 
(3)
The notice must be signed by the nominated person.
15

Part 3

 

Definitions

 

“Health or care professional”

 
 
18
In this Schedule “health or care professional” means—
 
 
(a)
a registered medical practitioner;
20
 
(b)
a registered nurse or midwife;
 
 
(c)
a person registered as a member of a profession to which
 
 
the Health and Social Work Professions Order 2001 (S.I.
 
 
2002/254) for the time being extends;
 
 
(d)
a person registered as a social worker in the register
25
 
maintained by Social Work England under section 39(1)
 
 
of the Children and Social Work Act 2017;
 
 
(e)
a person registered as a social worker in the register
 
 
maintained by Social Care Wales under section 80 of the
 
 
Regulation and Inspection of Social Care (Wales) Act 2016
30
 
(anaw 2).
 

“Independent mental health advocate”

 
 
19
In this Schedule “independent mental health advocate”, in relation
 
 
to a person appointing a nominated person, means an
 
 
independent mental health advocate appointed under
35
 
arrangements made under section 130A or 130E.
 

“Capacity”

 
 
20
In relation to a person who has attained the age of 16 years—
 

Page 85

 
(a)
references in this Schedule to lacking capacity are to
 
 
lacking capacity within the meaning of the Mental
 
 
Capacity Act 2005, and
 
 
(b)
references in this Schedule to having, ceasing to have or
 
 
gaining capacity are to be read accordingly.
5

“Relevant managers”

 
 
21
References in this Schedule to “the relevant managers” are—
 
 
(a)
in relation to a patient who is liable to be detained under
 
 
this Act in a hospital or registered establishment, the
 
 
managers of the hospital or registered establishment;
10
 
(b)
in relation to a patient who is the subject of an application
 
 
for admission for assessment or treatment, the managers
 
 
of the hospital or registered establishment to which
 
 
admission is sought;
 
 
(c)
in relation to a patient in relation to whom an approved
15
 
mental health professional is considering making an
 
 
application for admission for assessment or treatment, the
 
 
managers of the hospital or registered establishment to
 
 
which admission would be sought;
 
 
(d)
in relation to a community patient, the managers of the
20
 
responsible hospital.
 

“Relevant local social services authority”

 
 
22
References in this Schedule to “the relevant local social services
 
 
authority” are—
 
 
(a)
in relation to a person who is subject to guardianship—
25
 
(i)
where the patient is subject to the guardianship of
 
 
a local social services authority, to that authority;
 
 
(ii)
where the patient is subject to the guardianship of
 
 
a person other than a local social services authority,
 
 
to the local social services authority for the area
30
 
in which that person resides;
 
 
(b)
in relation to a person who is the subject of a guardianship
 
 
application, or in relation to whom an approved mental
 
 
health professional is considering making a guardianship
 
 
application—
35
 
(i)
where the application names or would name a
 
 
local social services authority as guardian, to that
 
 
authority;
 
 
(ii)
where the application names or would name a
 
 
person other than a local social services authority
40
 
as guardian, to the local social services authority
 
 
for the area in which the person named as
 
 
guardian resides.
 

Page 86

“Relevant patient”

 
 
23
In this Schedule “relevant patient” has the meaning given by
 
 
paragraph 7 (2) .”
 

Part 2

 

Functions of nominated person

5
 
4
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
5
In section 4 (admission for assessment in cases of emergency), in subsection
 
 
(2), for “the nearest relative of the patient” substitute “the patient’s
 
 
nominated person”.
 
 
6
(1)
Section 11 (general provisions as to applications) is amended as follows.
10
 
(2)
In subsection (1), for “the nearest relative of the patient” substitute “the
 
 
patient’s nominated person”.
 
 
(3)
In subsection (3)—
 
 
(a)
for “the nearest relative of the patient” substitute “the patient’s
 
 
nominated person”;
15
 
(b)
for “the nearest relative” substitute “the nominated person”.
 
 
7
In section 13 (duty of approved mental health professionals to make
 
 
applications for admission or guardianship), in subsection (4), for “the
 
 
nearest relative”, in both places it occurs, substitute “the nominated person”.
 
 
8
In section 14 (social reports), for “nearest relative” substitute “nominated
20
 
person”.
 
 
9
In section 23 (discharge of patients), in subsection (2)(a), (b) and (c), for
 
 
“the nearest relative of the patient” substitute “the patient’s nominated
 
 
person”.
 
 
10
In section 24 (visiting and examination of patient), in subsection (1), for
25
 
“the nearest relative”, in both places it occurs, substitute “the nominated
 
 
person”.
 
 
11
Omit sections 26 to 30 and the italic heading before section 26.
 
 
12
In section 32 (regulations for purposes of Part), in subsection (2)—
 
 
(a)
at the end of paragraph (c) insert “and”;
30
 
(b)
omit paragraph (e) and the “and” before it.
 
 
13
In section 33 (special provisions as to wards of court), in subsection (2), for
 
 
“nearest relative” substitute “nominated person”.
 
 
14
In section 66 (applications to tribunals), in subsection (1), in sub-paragraph
 
 
(ii), for “his nearest relative” substitute “the patient’s nominated person”.
35
 
15
In section 69 (applications to tribunals concerning patients subject to hospital
 
 
and guardianship orders), in subsection (1)(a) and (b)(ii), for “the nearest
 
 
relative of the patient” substitute “the patient’s nominated person”.
 

Page 87

 
16
In section 116 (welfare of certain hospital patients), in subsection (2) omit
 
 
paragraph (c) and the “or” before it.
 
 
17
In section 118 (code of practice), in subsection (1)—
 
 
(a)
omit the “and” at the end of paragraph (a);
 
 
(b)
after paragraph (b) insert—
5
 
“(c)
for the guidance of nominated persons in relation to
 
 
their functions under this Act and for the guidance
 
 
of health or care professionals within the meaning of
 
 
paragraph 17 of Schedule A1 in respect of their
 
 
functions under that Schedule;”.
10
 
18
In section 130B (arrangements in relation to independent mental advocates:
 
 
England), in subsection (5)(a), for “nearest relative” substitute “nominated
 
 
person”.
 
 
19
In section 130D (duty to give information about independent mental health
 
 
advocates), in subsection (5), for “nearest relative” substitute “nominated
15
 
person”.
 
 
20
In section 130H (independent mental health advocates for Wales:
 
 
supplementary powers and duties), in subsection (3)(b), for “nearest relative”
 
 
substitute “nominated person”.
 
 
21
In section 130K (duty to give information about independent mental health
20
 
advocates to Welsh qualifying compulsory patients), in subsection (6)(a),
 
 
for “nearest relative” substitute “nominated person”.
 
 
22
In section 132 (duty of managers of hospitals to give information to detained
 
 
patients), in subsection (4), for “nearest relative” substitute “nominated
 
 
person”.
25
 
23
In section 132A (duty of managers of hospitals to give information to
 
 
community patients), in subsection (3), for “nearest relative” substitute
 
 
“nominated person”.
 
 
24
(1)
Section 133 (duty of managers of hospitals to give information to community
 
 
patients) is amended as follows.
30
 
(2)
In the heading for “nearest relatives” substitute “nominated persons”.
 
 
(3)
In subsection (1)—
 
 
(a)
for “nearest relative”, in the first place it occurs, substitute
 
 
“nominated person”;
 
 
(b)
for “nearest relative of the patient” substitute “patient’s nominated
35
 
person”.
 
 
(4)
In subsections (1B) and (2), for “nearest relative” substitute “nominated
 
 
person”.
 
 
25
(1)
Section 145(1) (interpretation) is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
Omit the definition of “nearest relative”.
40

Page 88

 
(3)
At the appropriate place insert—
 
 
““nominated person” , in relation to a patient, means a person for the
 
 
time being appointed by or for the patient under Schedule A1;”.
 

Part 3

 

Patients concerned in criminal proceedings etc: functions of nominated

5

person

 
 
26
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
27
After section 36 (but before the italic heading after that section) insert—
 
“36A
Remands to hospital: nominated person
 
 
Sections 30A and 30B and Schedule A1 (nominated person) apply
10
 
in relation to a person remanded to hospital under section 35 or 36
 
 
as they apply in relation to a person subject to an order under
 
 
section 41 (see section 41(3) and Part 2 of Schedule 1).”
 
 
28
In section 38 (interim hospital orders), after subsection (7) insert—
 
 
“(8)
Sections 30A and 30B and Schedule A1 (nominated person) apply
15
 
in relation to an offender subject to an interim hospital order as
 
 
they apply in relation to a person subject to an order under section
 
 
41 (see section 41(3) and Part 2 of Schedule 1).”
 
 
29
In Part 1 of Schedule 1 (application of certain provisions to patients subject
 
 
to hospital and guardianship orders who are not subject to special
20
 
restrictions)—
 
 
(a)
in paragraph 1, for “26 to 28” substitute “ 30A ”;
 
 
(b)
in paragraph 2—
 
 
(i)
after “23” insert “, 30B ”;
 
 
(ii)
after “68” insert “and Schedule A1 ”;
25
 
(iii)
for “10” substitute “ 11 ”;
 
 
(c)
in paragraph 8(b), for “nearest relative” substitute “nominated
 
 
person”;
 
 
(d)
after paragraph 8 insert—
 
 
“8ZA
In section 30B —
30
 
(a)
in subsection (2) (b) the reference to an approved
 
 
mental health professional is to be read as a
 
 
reference to the responsible clinician;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (3) , paragraphs (a) and (b) are to be
 
 
omitted.”;
35
 
(e)
in paragraph 9 for “paragraph (ii)” substitute “paragraphs (ia), (ib)
 
 
and (ii)”;
 

Page 89

 
(f)
after paragraph 10 insert—
 
 
“11
In Schedule A1 , references to an approved mental health
 
 
professional are to be read as references to the responsible
 
 
clinician.”
 
 
30
In Part 2 of Schedule 1 (application of certain provisions to patients subject
5
 
to hospital and guardianship orders who are subject to special restrictions)—
 
 
(a)
in paragraph 1, after “Sections” insert “ 30A ,”;
 
 
(b)
in paragraph 2—
 
 
(i)
after “23” insert “, 30B ”;
 
 
(ii)
after “34” insert “and Schedule A1 ”;
10
 
(iii)
for “8” substitute “ 9 ”;
 
 
(c)
in paragraph 5—
 
 
(i)
omit the “and” at the end of paragraph (b);
 
 
(ii)
at the end of paragraph (c) insert “and
 
 
“(d)
in subsection (3A), after paragraph (a) there
15
 
is to be inserted—
 
 
“(za)
is inappropriate,”;
 
 
(d)
in paragraph 7(b)(i), for “the nearest relative of the patient” substitute
 
 
“the patient’s nominated person”;
 
 
(e)
after paragraph 7 insert—
20
 
“7A
In section 30B —
 
 
(a)
in subsection (2) (b) the reference to an approved
 
 
mental health professional is to be read as a
 
 
reference to the responsible clinician;
 
 
(b)
in subsection (3) , paragraphs (a) to (c) are to be
25
 
omitted.”;
 
 
(f)
after paragraph 8 insert—
 
 
“9
In Schedule A1 , references to an approved mental health
 
 
professional are to be read as references to the responsible
 
 
clinician.”
30
 
Schedule 3
section 41
 

Independent mental health advocates

 
 
1
The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
 
 
2
(1)
Section 118 (code of practice) is amended as follows.
 

Page 90

 
(2)
In subsection (1), after paragraph (c) (as inserted by Schedule 2 to this Act)
 
 
insert—
 
 
“(d)
for the guidance of independent mental health advocates
 
 
appointed under arrangements made under section 130A or
 
 
130E;”.
5
 
(3)
Omit subsection (1A).
 
 
3
(1)
Section 130A (independent mental health advocates) is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
In subsection (1), for “qualifying patients” substitute “English qualifying
 
 
patients”.
 
 
(3)
After subsection (1) insert—
10
 
“(1A)
In this Part “English qualifying patient” means—
 
 
(a)
an English qualifying compulsory patient (see section 130C),
 
 
or
 
 
(b)
an English qualifying informal patient (see section 130CA ).”
 
 
4
(1)
Section 130B (arrangements under section 130A) is amended as follows.
15
 
(2)
In subsection (1), for “a qualifying patient”, in both places it occurs,
 
 
substitute “an English qualifying compulsory patient”.
 
 
(3)
In subsection (2)—
 
 
(a)
for “a qualifying patient” substitute “an English qualifying
 
 
compulsory patient”;
20
 
(b)
omit the “and” at the end of paragraph (a);
 
 
(c)
after paragraph (b) insert—
 
 
“(c)
help (by way of representation or otherwise)—
 
 
(i)
for patients who wish to become involved, or
 
 
more involved, in decisions made about their
25
 
care or treatment, or care or treatment
 
 
generally; and
 
 
(ii)
for patients who wish to complain about their
 
 
care or treatment; and
 
 
(d)
the provision of information about other services
30
 
which are or may be available to the patient.”
 
 
(4)
After subsection (2) insert—
 
 
“(2A)
The help available to an English qualifying informal patient under
 
 
arrangements under section 130A must include help in obtaining
 
 
information about and understanding–
35
 
(a)
what (if any) medical treatment is given to the patient or is
 
 
proposed or discussed in the patient’s case,
 
 
(b)
why it is given, proposed or discussed, and
 
 
(c)
the authority under which it is, or would be, given.
 

Page 91

 
(2B)
The help available under the arrangements to an English qualifying
 
 
informal patient must also include—
 
 
(a)
help (by way of representation or otherwise)—
 
 
(i)
for patients who wish to become involved, or more
 
 
involved, in decisions made about their care or
5
 
treatment, or care or treatment generally, and
 
 
(ii)
for patients who wish to complain about their care
 
 
or treatment, and
 
 
(b)
the provision of information about other services which are
 
 
or may be available to the patient.
10
 
(2C)
Arrangements under section 130A must require a provider of
 
 
advocacy services, on becoming aware of an English qualifying
 
 
compulsory patient for whom they are responsible, to arrange for
 
 
an independent mental health advocate to visit and interview the
 
 
patient (if possible) with a view to determining—
15
 
(a)
whether the patient has the capacity or is competent to take
 
 
a decision about whether to receive help from an
 
 
independent mental health advocate,
 
 
(b)
if the patient does have that capacity or competence, whether
 
 
the patient wishes to receive such help, and
20
 
(c)
if the patient does not have that capacity or competence,
 
 
whether it is nonetheless in the patient’s best interests to
 
 
receive such help (which, if so, is to be provided under the
 
 
arrangements).
 
 
(2D)
For the purposes of subsection (2C) —
25
 
(a)
“provider of advocacy services” means a person required by
 
 
arrangements under section 130A to make available the
 
 
services of independent mental health advocates, and
 
 
(b)
a provider of advocacy services is “responsible” for an
 
 
English qualifying compulsory patient if the arrangements
30
 
require the provider to make available the services of an
 
 
independent mental health advocate to help that patient.”
 
 
(5)
In subsection (3), for “the arrangements” substitute “arrangements under
 
 
section 130A”.
 
 
(6)
In subsection (6) for “declining to be provided with” substitute “refusing
35
 
consent to the provision of”.
 
 
(7)
After subsection (6) insert—
 
 
“(6A)
A reference in this section to a patient who has capacity is to be
 
 
read in accordance with the Mental Capacity Act 2005.””.
 
 
(8)
In subsection (7) omit paragraph (a).
40
 
5
(1)
Section 130C (section 130A: supplemental) is amended as follows.
 
 
(2)
For the heading, substitute ““English qualifying compulsory patients””.
 

Page 92

 
(3)
Omit subsection (1).
 
 
(4)
In subsection (2) for “A patient is a qualifying patient” substitute “For the
 
 
purposes of this Part a patient is an English qualifying compulsory patient”.
 
 
(5)
In subsection (3)—
 
 
(a)
in the words before paragraph (a), for “A patient is also a qualifying
5
 
patient” substitute “For the purposes of this Part a patient is also
 
 
an English qualifying compulsory patient”;
 
 
(b)
in paragraphs (a) and (b), for “a qualifying patient” substitute “an
 
 
English qualifying compulsory patient”.
 
 
(6)
In subsection (4), for “a qualifying patient”, in both places it occurs,
10
 
substitute “an English qualifying compulsory patient”.
 
 
(7)
Omit subsections (4A) and (4B).
 
 
6
After section 130C insert—
 
“130CA
“English qualifying informal patients”
 
 
For the purposes of this Part a patient is an “English qualifying
15
 
informal patient” if—
 
 
(a)
the patient is an in-patient at a hospital or registered
 
 
establishment situated in England,
 
 
(b)
the patient is receiving treatment for, or assessment in
 
 
relation to, mental disorder at the hospital or registered
20
 
establishment, and
 
 
(c)
no application, order, direction or report renders the patient
 
 
liable to be detained under this Act.
 
 
130CB
Local social services authority responsible for making
 
 
arrangements under section 130A(1)
25
 
(1)
For the purposes of section 130A(1) a local social services authority
 
 
is responsible for an English qualifying patient if—
 
 
(a)
in the case of an English qualifying compulsory patient
 
 
falling within section 130C(2)(a), the hospital or registered
 
 
establishment in which the patient is liable to be detained
30
 
is situated in that authority’s area;
 
 
(b)
in the case of an English qualifying compulsory patient
 
 
falling within section 130C(2)(b), that authority is the
 
 
responsible local social services authority within the meaning
 
 
of section 34(3);
35
 
(c)
in the case of an English qualifying compulsory patient
 
 
falling within section 130C(2)(c), the responsible hospital is
 
 
situated in that authority’s area;
 
 
(d)
in the case of an English qualifying compulsory patient
 
 
falling within section 130C(3)—
40
 
(i)
in a case where the patient has capacity or is
 
 
competent to do so, the patient nominates that
 

Page 93

 
authority as responsible for the purposes of section
 
 
130A, or
 
 
(ii)
in any other case, a donee or deputy or the Court of
 
 
Protection, or a person engaged in caring for the
 
 
patient or interested in the patient’s welfare,
5
 
nominates that authority on the patient’s behalf as
 
 
responsible for the purposes of that section;
 
 
(e)
in the case of an English qualifying informal patient, the
 
 
hospital or registered establishment to which the patient is
 
 
admitted as an in-patient is situated in that authority’s area.
10
 
(2)
In subsection (1) (d) —
 
 
(a)
the reference to a patient who has capacity is to be read in
 
 
accordance with the Mental Capacity Act 2005;
 
 
(b)
the reference to a donee is to a donee of a lasting power of
 
 
attorney (within the meaning of section 9 of that Act) created
15
 
by the patient, where the donee is acting within the scope
 
 
of their authority and in accordance with that Act;
 
 
(c)
the reference to a deputy is to a deputy appointed for the
 
 
patient by the Court of Protection under section 16 of that
 
 
Act, where the deputy is acting within the scope of the their
20
 
authority and in accordance with that Act.
 
 
130CC
Duty to notify providers of person’s eligibility for advocacy
 
 
services
 
 
(1)
The responsible person in relation to an English qualifying patient
 
 
must take such steps as are practicable to give the appropriate
25
 
provider of advocacy services the required information about the
 
 
patient.
 
 
(2)
In this section “the responsible person” means—
 
 
(a)
in relation to an English qualifying compulsory patient falling
 
 
within section 130C(2)(a), the managers of the hospital or
30
 
registered establishment in which the patient is liable to be
 
 
detained;
 
 
(b)
in relation to an English qualifying compulsory patient falling
 
 
within section 130C(2)(b), the responsible local social services
 
 
authority within the meaning of section 34(3);
35
 
(c)
in relation to an English qualifying compulsory patient falling
 
 
within section 130C(2)(c), the managers of the responsible
 
 
hospital;
 
 
(d)
in relation to an English qualifying compulsory patient falling
 
 
within section 130C(3), the managers of the hospital or
40
 
registered establishment in which the treatment would be
 
 
given;
 

Page 94

 
(e)
in relation to an English qualifying informal patient, the
 
 
managers of the hospital or registered establishment to which
 
 
the patient is admitted as an in-patient.
 
 
(3)
In this section “appropriate provider of advocacy services”, in
 
 
relation to a patient, means the person required by arrangements
5
 
under section 130A to make available the services of an independent
 
 
mental health advocate to help that patient.
 
 
(4)
In this section “the required information”, in relation to a patient,
 
 
means such information relating to the patient as may be prescribed
 
 
in regulations made by the Secretary of State.”
10
 
7
For section 130D substitute—
 
“130DA
Duty to give information to English qualifying informal patients
 
 
(1)
The responsible person in relation to an English qualifying informal
 
 
patient must take such steps as are practicable to ensure that the
 
 
patient understands—
15
 
(a)
that help is available to the patient from an independent
 
 
mental health advocate, and
 
 
(b)
how the patient can obtain that help.
 
 
(2)
In this section “the responsible person”, in relation to an English
 
 
qualifying informal patient, means the managers of the hospital or
20
 
registered establishment to which the patient is admitted as an
 
 
in-patient.
 
 
(3)
The steps to be taken under subsection (1) must be taken as soon
 
 
as practicable after the patient becomes an English qualifying
 
 
informal patient.
25
 
(4)
The steps that must be taken under subsection (1) include giving
 
 
the requisite information both orally and in writing.
 
 
(5)
The responsible person in relation to an English qualifying informal
 
 
patient must, except where the patient otherwise requests, take such
 
 
steps as are practicable to give the person (if any) appearing to the
30
 
responsible person to be the patient’s nominated person a copy of
 
 
any information given to the patient in writing under subsection
 
 
(1) .
 
 
(6)
The steps to be taken under subsection (5) must be taken when the
 
 
information concerned is given to the patient or within a reasonable
35
 
time thereafter.”
 
Amendments
Opposition Amendment 46

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

Clause 45, page 57, leave out lines 5 to 11 and insert—
“(1) All eligible patients shall have a right to create an advance choice document.
(1A) For the purposes of this section, an “eligible patient” is a patient who—
(a) has previously been detained under Part 2 or Part 3 of this Act,
(b) has been diagnosed with a mental disorder which may lead to the possibility they will be detained under this Act in the future, or
(c) is an English qualifying informal patient (see section 130CA).
(1B) NHS England and each integrated care board must make such arrangements as it considers appropriate for—
(a) ensuring that all eligible patients for whom it is responsible for the purposes of this section are informed of their right to create an advance choice document, and
(b) helping an eligible patient to create an advance choice document.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Luke Evans (Con - Hinckley and Bosworth) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Parliamentary Under Secretary (Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment gives all eligible patients the statutory right to create an advance choice document if they so wish.

Opposition Amendment 54

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

Schedule 2, page 77, line 21, at end insert—
“(3) Where the patient has not attained the age of 16 years, a nominated person must have parental responsibility for the patient.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Ben Spencer (Con - Runnymede and Weybridge) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Minister (Science, Innovation and Technology)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would stipulate that the nominated person for a patient under 16 must have parental responsibility for the patient.

Opposition Amendment 55

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Schedule 2, page 80, line 13, after “2(2))” insert “, has parental responsibility for the patient (see paragraph 2(3))”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Ben Spencer (Con - Runnymede and Weybridge) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Minister (Science, Innovation and Technology)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would stipulate that the nominated person for a patient under 16 must have parental responsibility for the patient.

Government Amendment 32

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Clause 45, page 57, line 11, at end insert “, and
(c) bringing the availability of that information and help to the attention of such people as it considers appropriate.”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This provides that NHS England and integrated care boards must make arrangements for bringing information and help available under new section 130M to the attention of such people as they consider appropriate.

Government Amendment 40

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Schedule 2, page 81, line 25, leave out from beginning to end of line 3 on page 82 and insert—
(3)If no local authority has parental responsibility for the relevant patient but there are one or more other persons who have parental responsibility and who are willing to act as the nominated person, the approved mental health professional must appoint one of them.”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This requires a person with parental responsibility to be appointed as nominated person even if a child arrangements order or special guardianship order is in place.

Government Amendment 33

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Clause 45, page 57, line 11, at end insert—
“(1A) The arrangements that must be made under subsection (1) include such arrangements as NHS England or the integrated care board considers appropriate for people to be given information or help by having a conversation with someone who is suitably qualified, whether in-person or remotely.
(1B) In deciding how to discharge the duty under subsection (1), NHS England or an integrated care board must have regard to the particular benefits to a person of making an advance choice document within 12 months of their discharge from a hospital or a registered establishment where they were receiving medical treatment for, or assessment in relation to, mental disorder.”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This imposes further requirements on NHS England and integrated care boards in relation to their duty to make arrangements to make available information about advance choice documents and to help people to make advance choice documents.

Opposition Amendment 18

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 45, page 57, line 33, at end insert—
“(3A) An “advance choice document” under subsection (3) should include consideration of the person’s financial circumstances.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that the advance choice document includes matters relating to the patient’s financial circumstances.

Government Amendment 41

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Schedule 2, page 82, line 4, leave out “[sub-paragraph removed]” and insert “sub-paragraph (3)”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This is consequential on amendment 40.

Government Amendment 34

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Clause 45, page 58, line 10, at end insert “, and
(c) bringing the availability of that information and help to the attention of such people as it considers appropriate.”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This provides that Local Health Boards must make arrangements for bringing information and help available under new section 130N to the attention of such people as they consider appropriate.

Opposition Amendment 49

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED

Schedule 2, page 87, line 13, at end insert—
“(18A) In section 130B (arrangements in relation to independent mental advocates: England), after subsection (3)(d), insert—
“(e) support the patient’s carer and family members to prepare for the patient’s discharge from hospital treatment, and
(f) support the patient to access help with social and financial stressors that might otherwise increase their likelihood of future detention.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment extends the support offered by Mental Health advocates to cover social and financial stressors and support for family carers and other members of the household when the patient is discharged.

Government Amendment 35

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Clause 45, page 58, line 10, at end insert—
“(1A) The arrangements that must be made under subsection (1) include such arrangements as the Local Health Board considers appropriate for people to be given information or help by having a conversation with someone who is suitably qualified, whether in-person or remotely.
(1B) In deciding how to discharge the duty under subsection (1), a Local Health Board must have regard to the particular benefits to a person of making an advance choice document within 12 months of their discharge from a hospital or a registered establishment where they were receiving medical treatment for, or assessment in relation to, mental disorder.”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This imposes further requirements on Local Health Boards in relation to their duty to make arrangements to make available information about advance choice documents and to help people to make advance choice documents.

Government Amendment 31

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Page 48, line 9, leave out Clause 35

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This leaves out clause 35, which requires discharged patients to be offered a consultation with an independent mental health advocate to review their experiences of hospital treatment.

Government Amendment 36

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Page 60, line 32, leave out Clause 50

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

See explanatory statement for amendment 26.

Opposition Amendment 19

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

Schedule 3, page 91, line 13, after “patient” insert “or English qualifying informal patient under 18”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment extends the provision of opt-out advocacy services in England to informal inpatients under 18.

Government Amendment NC10

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

To move the following Clause—
“Human Rights Act 1998: extension to certain private care providers
In the Mental Health Act 1983, after section 142B insert—
“142C Human Rights Act 1998: extension to certain private care providers
(1) A registered care provider is to be regarded for the purposes of section 6(3)(b) of the Human Rights Act 1998 as exercising a function of a public nature in providing any of the services mentioned in subsection (2) (to the extent that it would not otherwise be so regarded).
(2) The services are—
(a) after-care services provided in pursuance of arrangements made under section 117;
(b) services provided in pursuance of arrangements made by a local authority in Scotland discharging its duty under section 25 of the Mental Health (Care and Treatment) (Scotland) Act 2003;
(c) the provision of medical treatment for mental disorder or assessment in relation to mental disorder, for an in-patient at a hospital, but only where that treatment or assessment is arranged or paid for by an NHS body.
(3) In this section—
“hospital” means any institution for the reception and treatment of people—
(a) suffering from mental disorder or other illness,
(b) convalescing, or
(c) requiring medical rehabilitation;
“illness” includes any injury or disability requiring medical treatment or nursing;
“NHS body” —
(a) in relation to England, has the meaning given by section 275(1) of the National Health Service Act 2006;
(b) in relation to Wales, has the meaning given by section 206(1) of the National Health Service (Wales) Act 2006;
(c) in relation to Scotland, a health board constituted by order made under section 2 of the National Health Service (Scotland) Act 1978;
(d) in relation to Northern Ireland means—
(i) the Department of Health, or
(ii) a Health and Social Care Trust;
“registered care provider” means--
(a) a person registered under Chapter 2 of Part 1 of the Health and Social Care Act 2008,
(b) a person registered under Part 2 of the Care Standards Act 2000 or Part 1 of the Regulation and Inspection of Social Care (Wales) Act 2016,
(c) a person providing—
(i) a care service which is registered under section 59 of the Public Services Reform (Scotland) Act 2010, or
(ii) an independent health care service registered under section 10P of the National Health Service (Scotland) Act 1978, or
(d) a person registered under Part 3 of the Health and Personal Social Services (Quality, Improvement and Regulation) (Northern Ireland) Order 2003.””

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This extends the remit of the Human Rights Act 1998 to cover private care providers when providing certain services arranged or paid for by public authorities.

Government Amendment 42

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Schedule 3, page 92, leave out lines 22 and 23 and insert—
“(c) the patient is not liable to be detained under this Act or any other legislation or by virtue of a court order.”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This changes the definition of “English qualifying informal patient” to exclude those detained under any legislation or by virtue of a court order (rather than just those detained under the Mental Health Act 1983).

Government Amendment 43

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Schedule 3, page 94, line 36, at end insert—
“8 In section 130J (Welsh qualifying informal patients), in subsection (2), for paragraph (c) substitute—
“(c) the patient is not liable to be detained under this Act or any other legislation or by virtue of a court order”.”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This changes the definition of “Welsh qualifying informal patient” to exclude those detained under any legislation or by virtue of a court order (rather than just those detained under the Mental Health Act 1983).

Opposition Amendment NC1

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—
“Reporting: racial disparities relating to community treatment orders
(1) Within a period of 12 months following the day on which this Act is passed, the Secretary of State must undertake a review of racial disparities which relate to the use and administering of community treatment orders.
(2) The review under subsection (1) must include, but is not limited to—
(a) an assessment of whether certain racial or ethnic groups are disproportionately represented among individuals subject to community treatment orders compared to their representation in the general population;
(b) a review of the outcomes and effectiveness of community treatment orders across different racial groups, including health outcomes, and patient experiences.
(3) The Secretary of State must lay a report of the findings of the review before Parliament within 18 months of the day on which this Act is passed.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause seeks to gauge the Government’s view on prevalent racial disparities as they relate to the use of community treatment orders under the Act.

Opposition Amendment NC2

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

To move the following Clause—
“Mental Health Crisis Breathing Space
(1) Any person detained under sections 3, 37, 41 or 47 of the Mental Health Act 1983 must be offered support from the mental health crisis breathing space debt respite scheme.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause ensures that MHCBS, a debt respite scheme, is offered and available to patients detained under sections 3, 37, 41 and 47 of the Mental Health Act 1983.

Opposition Amendment NC3

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

To move the following Clause—
“Addressing and reporting on racial disparities and other inequalities in the use of the Mental Health Act 1983
After section 120D of the Mental Health Act 1983, insert—
“120E Mental health units and services to have a responsible person
(1) A relevant health organisation that operates a mental health unit or community mental health service for qualifying patients must appoint a responsible person for that unit or service for the purposes of addressing racial disparities and other disparities based on protected characteristics related to functions discharged under the Mental Health Act 1983.
(2) The responsible person must—
(a) be employed by the relevant health organisation, and
(b) be of an appropriate level of seniority.
(3) Where a relevant health organisation operates more than one mental health unit or service, that organisation must appoint a single responsible person in relation to all of the mental health units or services operated by that organisation.
(4) A patient is a qualifying patient if they are—
(a) liable to be detained under this Act, otherwise than by virtue of section 4 or 5(2) or (4) or section 135 or 136;
(b) subject to guardianship under this Act;
(c) a community patient.
120F Policy on racial disparities and other disparities based on protected characteristics
(1) The responsible person must publish a policy on how the unit plans to reduce racial disparities and other disparities based on protected characteristics in that unit or service.
(2) The policy published under subsection (1) must cover the following topics—
(a) the application of the guiding principles to all aspects of operation of this Act;
(b) staff knowledge and competence in connection with promoting equality and anti-discriminatory practice in relation to this Act;
(c) workforce demographics, recruitment, retention and progression;
(d) implementation of the patient and carer race equality framework (England only) and any other requirements of relevant national policies;
(e) care planning and decision-making in the use of this Act including section 56A (making treatment decisions);
(f) the availability of alternatives to detention and involuntary treatment;
(g) take-up of independent mental health advocacy;
(h) the cultural appropriateness of independent mental health advocacy;
(i) access to and use of advance choice documents;
(j) what steps will be taken to reduce racial disparities and other disparities based on protected characteristics in that unit or service.
(3) Where a responsible person is appointed in relation to all of the mental health units operated by a relevant health organisation, the responsible person must publish a single policy under subsection (1) in relation to those units or services.
(4) Before publishing a policy under subsection (1), the responsible person must—
(a) consult any persons that the responsible person considers appropriate;
(b) have regard to the following matters—
(i) the views, wishes and feelings of people from ethnic minority communities who have been detained;
(ii) the views, wishes and feelings of people with other protected characteristics who have been detained.
(5) The responsible person must keep under review any policy published under this section.
(6) The responsible person may from time to time revise any policy published under this section and, if this is done, must publish the policy as revised.
(7) If the responsible person considers that any revisions would amount to a substantial change in the policy, the responsible person must consult any persons that the responsible person considers appropriate before publishing the revised policy.
120G Training in racial disparities and other disparities based on protected characteristics
(1) The responsible person for each mental health unit or service must provide training for staff that relates to addressing racial disparities and other disparities based on protected characteristics in that unit or service.
(2) The training provided under subsection (1) must include training on the topics covered in section 120F(2).
(3) Subject to subsection (4), training must be provided—
(a) in the case of a person who is a member of staff when this section comes into force, as soon as reasonably practicable after this section comes into force, or
(b) in the case of a person who becomes a member of staff after this section comes into force, as soon as reasonably practicable after they become a member of staff.
(4) Subsection (3) does not apply if the responsible person considers that any training provided to the person before this section came into force or before the person became a member of staff—
(a) was given sufficiently recently, and
(b) is of an equivalent standard to the training provided under this section.
(5) Refresher training must be provided at regular intervals whilst a person is a member of staff.
(6) In subsection (5) “refresher training” means training that updates or supplements the training provided under subsection (1).
120H Annual report by the Secretary of State
(1) As soon as reasonably practicable after the end of each calendar year, the Secretary of State must conduct a review in consultation with relevant bodies with commissioning functions on the use of treatment and detention measures contained in the Mental Health Act 1983 broken down by race and other demographic information.
(2) Having conducted a review under subsection (1), the Secretary of State must publish a report on the progress made in reducing inequalities in treatment outcomes and the use of detention measures in the use of this Act on people who have protected characteristics under the Equality Act 2010.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause requires mental health units and services to appoint a responsible person tasked with addressing racial disparities related to functions discharged under the Mental Health Act 1983.

Opposition Amendment NC4

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

To move the following Clause—
“General duty to secure sufficient resources for services in the community
(1) It is the general duty of integrated care boards to ensure, insofar as is reasonably practical, that services in the community responsible for delivering care, treatment, or detention provisions under the Mental Health Act 1983 and this Act have the necessary resources, including financial support, to meet service demands.
(2) Additional forms of resource may be determined by integrated care boards in consultation with relevant local authorities or health care service providers and may include—
(a) sufficient numbers of trained medical professionals;
(b) purpose-built facilities for patient care;
(c) community services responsible for out-patient care.
(3) Each Integrated Care Board must conduct an assessment of its resources every two years to evaluate its ability to deliver services in the community effectively.
(4) Each Integrated Care Board must publish a report outlining its findings upon completing the assessment in subsection (3). The first reports must be published within one year of the passage of this Act.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 3

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025
Freddie van Mierlo (LD - Henley and Thame) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause places a general duty on integrated care boards to ensure that services in the community have the necessary level of resource to meet demand on services to ensure that the provisions of the Bill function as intended and to assess and report on this every 2 years.

Opposition Amendment NC5

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

To move the following Clause—
“Report: statutory competency test for under-16s
Within 12 months of day on which this Act is passed, the Secretary of State must undertake a review of whether a statutory competency test for under-16s in determining their ability to make a relevant decision would be expedient for the purposes of this Act or the Mental Health Act 1983.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause requires the Secretary of State to undertake a review of whether a statutory competency test for under-16s would be expedient for the purposes of this Bill and the Mental Health Act 1983.

Opposition Amendment NC6

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—
“Duty to promote mental health wellbeing
After section 142B of the Mental Health Act 1983, insert—
“Duty to promote mental health wellbeing
(1) It is a general duty of local authorities and anybody in carrying out functions under this Act or the Mental Health Act 2025 to promote mental health wellbeing.
(2) In carrying out the duty under subsection (1), local authorities and commissioning bodies must have regard to—
(a) the prevention of mental illness,
(b) the promotion of positive mental health,
(c) the reduction of stigma and discrimination associated with mental health conditions, and
(d) the provision of accessible and appropriate support services to individuals experiencing mental health challenges.
(3) Local authorities and commissioning bodies must publish an annual report outlining the steps taken to discharge their duty under subsection (1), including an assessment of—
(a) progress in improving mental health wellbeing in their area for persons affected by the provisions of this Act, and
(b) any barriers to promoting mental health wellbeing for such persons and proposed actions to address them.
(4) The Secretary of State may issue guidance on the discharge of the duty under subsection (1), and local authorities and commissioning bodies must have regard to such guidance.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require local authorities and commissioning bodies to promote and report annually on mental health wellbeing, with regard to any guidance published by the Secretary of State.

Opposition Amendment NC7

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—
“Funding and reporting
(1) For each financial year until all sections of this Act have come into force, of the total health service expenditure by the bodies (taken together) in subsection (2), the proportion which relates to mental health spending—
(a) under the Mental Health Act 1983, and
(b) under this Act or which, in future, would be made under provision inserted into the Mental Health Act 1983 by this Act, (taken together) must not decrease.
(2) The bodies are the Department of Health and Social Care, NHS England and integrated care boards.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require that mental health spending as a proportion of health service expenditure must not decrease in the implementation period of the Act.

Opposition Amendment NC8

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

To move the following Clause—
“Mental Health Commissioner
After section 142B of the Mental Health Act 1983, insert—
“Mental Health Commissioner
142C Independent Mental Health Commissioner: establishment
(1) There is to be an office known as the Office of the Mental Health Commissioner.
(2) The Office in subsection (1) must be established by the Secretary of State three months after the day on which the Mental Health Act 2025 is passed.
(3) The Office of the Mental Health Commissioner will be led by an individual appointed by the Secretary of State titled the “Independent Mental Health Commissioner”.
(4) The role in subsection (3) is referred to as the “Mental Health Commissioner”.
(5) The Mental Health Commissioner may appoint staff to the Office of the Mental Health Commissioner they consider necessary for assisting in the exercise of their functions in section 142D.
142D Functions of the Commissioner
(1) The Mental Health Commissioner is responsible for overseeing the implementation and operability of functions discharged by relevant bodies and persons under the provisions of this Act, the Mental Health Act 1983, and the Mental Capacity Act 2025 particularly regarding the provision of treatment, care, and detention of people with a mental disorder.
(2) The Mental Health Commissioner must publish an annual report on the use of functions discharged under this Act, which must assess—
(a) the quality of mental health care treatment provided by relevant services;
(b) the accessibility of mental health care treatment services;
(c) the relationship between mental health and the criminal justice system;
(d) inequalities of mental health care provision regarding protected characteristics under the Equality Act 2010;
(e) the use and effectiveness of detention measures under this Act, including but not limited to Community Treatment Orders, for the purposes of therapeutic benefit outlined in section 1(2B);
(f) challenges surrounding stigma of mental health conditions;
(g) the accessibility of advice and support to mental health service users, their families and carers on their legal rights;
(h) other issues deemed appropriate by the Mental Health Commissioner.
(3) In fulfilling their duties under subsection (1), the Mental Health Commissioner may review, and monitor the operation of, arrangements falling within subsection (1), (2) and (3) for the purpose of ascertaining whether, and to what extent, the arrangements are effective in promoting the principles in section 118(2B) of this Act.
(4) Subject to any directions from the Secretary of State, the Commissioner may take action necessary or expedient in connection for the purposes of their functions.
(5) This may include—
(a) collaborating with health services, public authorities, charitable organisations, and other relevant entities, including NHS bodies, the Care Quality Commission, and the Parliamentary and Health Service Ombudsman;
(b) ensuring enforcement authorities and public bodies under the Mental Health Act 1983 have the necessary capacity and resources to adequately discharge duties under the Mental Health Act 1983 and this Act.
142E Appointment, Tenure, and Remuneration of the Mental Health Commissioner
(1) The Secretary of State may by regulation make provision for the appointment, tenure, removal, and general terms of appointment of the Mental Health Commissioner.
(2) The Secretary of State may also by regulation determine the Commissioner’s remuneration, allowances, and pension entitlements.
142F Examination of cases
(1) The Secretary of State may, by regulations, make provision for the examination by the Mental Health Commissioner of the cases of those who are detained under this Act receiving treatment by authorised mental health care providers.
(2) The Secretary of State may, by regulations, provide for the Office of the Mental Health Commissioner to access and examine relevant data on mental health treatment provision held by NHS England and any other authorities the Secretary of State considers appropriate.
142G Regulations
A statutory instrument containing regulations under sections 142E and 142F may not be made unless a draft of the instrument has been laid before and approved by a resolution of each House of Parliament.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause establishes the office of the Mental Health Commissioner and makes provisions for relevant duties and responsibilities.

Opposition Amendment NC9

Tabled: 03 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 3 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—
“Veterans’ Mental Health Oversight Officer
After section 142B of the Mental Health Act 1983, insert—
“Veterans’ Mental Health Oversight Officer
142C Veterans’ Mental Health Oversight Officer: establishment
(1) The Secretary of State shall appoint a Veterans’ Mental Health Oversight Officer ("the Officer") to oversee the treatment and care of veterans under this Act.
(2) The Officer shall—
(a) oversee the cases of veterans who are:
(i) at risk of detention under this Act;
(ii) currently detained under this Act; or
(iii) following detention under this Act, subject to community or outpatient treatment or other post-discharge mental health provisions;
(b) advocate for mental health assessments and care tailored to veterans' service-related experiences;
(c) collaborate with mental health professionals, veterans' services, legal representatives, and third-sector organisations to safeguard veterans' rights and well-being within relevant treatment settings;
(d) promote diversion from detention where clinically appropriate, including the use of veteran-specific support services; and
(e) submit an annual report to Parliament detailing:
(i) detention rates of veterans under this Act;
(ii) outcomes and recidivism rates for veterans detained under this Act;
(iii) recommendations for service improvement.
(3) In this section:
(a) “veteran” refers to a person who has served or currently serves in the armed forces of the United Kingdom or a Commonwealth nation.
(b) “relevant health authority” includes NHS England, regional NHS boards, or their successors.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 03 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause introduces a dedicated oversight role for veterans within the framework of the Mental Health Bill, recognising that service personnel have unique needs and experiences that need to be considered in mental health care and detention decisions.

Opposition Amendment NC11

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

To move the following Clause—
“Costed plan to ensure community provision for individuals with learning disabilities and autism who are at risk of detention
(1) Within 18 months of the day on which this Act is passed, the Secretary of State must publish a fully costed plan for how Integrated Care Boards and local authorities will ensure provision of adequate community services for individuals with learning disabilities and autistic people who are at risk of detention under Part 2 of the Mental Health Act 1983.
(2) As part of the development of that plan, a formal consultation process must take place to determine how the decision to enact the relevant parts of this Act will be made.
(3) The consultation must include input from relevant stakeholders, including—
(a) individuals with learning disabilities and autistic people;
(b) carers for people with learning disabilities and autistic people;
(c) healthcare professionals; and
(d) advocacy groups.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Luke Evans (Con - Hinckley and Bosworth) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Parliamentary Under Secretary (Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause requires a costed plan to ensure that ICBs and local authorities are able to provide adequate community services for individuals with learning disabilities and autistic people at risk of detention under Part 2 of the 1983 Act, informed by a consultation with a range of stakeholders.

Opposition Amendment NC12

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

To move the following Clause—
“Age-appropriate treatment for children
(1) Section 131A of the Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
(2) After subsection (1), insert—
“(1A) A patient to whom this section applies must not be detained in, or admitted to, an adult ward unless the managers of the hospital consider that—
(a) there are exceptional circumstances which justify the patient’s detention in, or admission to, an adult ward; and
(b) the decision is in accordance with the best interests of the child.”
(3) After subsection (3) insert—
“(3A) Where a patient has been detained in, or admitted to, an adult ward, the managers of the hospital must record in writing the reasons for the admission, including—
(a) the reason, or reasons, why other options for accommodation were not available or suitable for the patient;
(b) details of the measures to be taken by the hospital to ensure that, while the patient is detained or otherwise accommodated in the adult ward, the patient is provided with care in a safe environment; and
(c) unless it has been determined that an adult ward is the most appropriate environment for the patient in accordance with subsection (1A), the steps being taken by the hospital to transfer the patient to more appropriate accommodation.
(3B) Where a patient to whom this section applies is—
(a) detained in, or admitted to, an adult ward or placed out of area; and
(b) the detention or admission is of more than 24 consecutive hours' duration,
the managers of the hospital must notify the regulatory authority immediately, setting out why they consider that the requirements under subsection (1A) above are met and providing the information set out in subsection (3A).
(3C) Subsection (3D) applies when—
(a) the managers of a hospital accommodate a patient to whom this section applies in an adult ward for a consecutive period of at least 28 days; or
(b) detain or admit a patient to whom this section applies who—
(i) was ordinarily resident immediately before being detained or admitted in the area of a local authority other than the local authority within whose area the hospital is situated, or
(ii) was not ordinarily resident within the area of any local authority.
(3D)Where this subsection applies, the managers of the hospital must immediately inform the appropriate officer of the responsible local authority—
(a) of the patient's detention or admission, and
(b) when the patient's detention or admission ceases.”
(4) Leave out subsection (4) and insert—
"(4) In this section—
(a) “adult ward” means a ward in a hospital to which persons aged 18 or over are detained in or admitted to;
(b) “the appropriate officer” means—
(i) in relation to a local authority in England, their director of children's services, and
(ii) in relation to a local authority in Wales, their director of social services;
(c) ”hospital” includes a registered establishment; and
(d) ”the responsible authority” means—
(i) the local authority appearing to the managers of the hospital to be the authority within whose area the child was ordinarily resident immediately before being detained or admitted, or
(ii) where it appears to the managers of the hospital that the patient was not ordinarily resident within the area of any local authority, the local authority within whose area the hospital is situated.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Luke Evans (Con - Hinckley and Bosworth) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Parliamentary Under Secretary (Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause seeks to ensure that children are only placed on adult wards where there are exceptional circumstances, and it is in their best interests. It includes procedural safeguards for determining the reasons behind (and suitability of) admitting a child to a hospital environment in which adults are simultaneously accommodated or in an out of area placement.

Opposition Amendment NC13

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

To move the following Clause—
“Duty to review the functions of the regulatory authority
(1) Within the period of one year from the passage of this Act, the Secretary of State must carry out a review of the regulatory authority’s role under the Mental Health Act 1983.
(2) The review under subsection (1) must include an assessment of the effectiveness of the regulatory authority’s role—
(a) in carrying out its duties under the Mental Health Act 1983, and
(b) in regulating the provision of mental health services under the Mental Health Act 1983.
(3) The review under subsection (1) must also include an assessment of whether the regulatory authority will be able to effectively carry out its duties under this Act.
(4) The Secretary of State must publish the results of the review in a report and must lay that report before both Houses of Parliament.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Luke Evans (Con - Hinckley and Bosworth) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Parliamentary Under Secretary (Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the Government to carry out a review of the effectiveness of the regulatory authority for the Mental Health Act 1983 (the Care Quality Commission) at carrying out its duties under that Act.

Opposition Amendment NC14

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—
“Adequacy of accommodation: review
(1) The Mental Health Bill 1983 is amended as follows.
(2) After Section 131A (Accommodation etc. for children) insert—
“131B Adequacy of accommodation
(1) The Secretary of State must, within 12 months of the passage of the Mental Health Act 2025, publish a review of the quality of accommodation for any patient who is—
(a) liable to be detained in a hospital under this Act;
(b) admitted to, or remains in, a hospital in pursuance of such arrangements as are mentioned in section 131(1) above.
(2) The Secretary of State must, within six months of the publication of the review under subsection (1), publish a strategy to implement the recommendations of that review.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require a review of the quality of accommodation for people detained or admitted to hospital under the Mental Health Act 1983 and require the Secretary of State to publish a strategy to implement the recommendations of this review.

Opposition Amendment NC15

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—
“Review of impact of this Act on detention
(1) The Secretary of State must, within a period of 12 months following the day on which this Act is passed, commission an independent review into the impact of relevant provisions on reducing the number of people detained under Part 2 of the Mental Health Act 1983.
(2) In subsection (1), “relevant provisions” include—
(a) sections 4, 5 and 6,
(b) section 8,
(c) section 21, and
(d) sections 46 and 47.
(3) The Secretary of State must, within 12 months of the publication of the review in subsection (1), publish a strategy to implement the recommendations of that review.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the Secretary of State to commission a review into the impact of relevant provisions in the Act in reducing the number of people detained, in particular the provisions relating to people with autism or a learning disability, on grounds for detention and for community treatment orders, medical treatment, care and treatment plans, and on after-care, and to implement any recommendations within 12 months of the publication of the review.

Opposition Amendment NC16

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—
“Transfer of patients: out of area placements
(1) The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
(2) After section 19 (transfer of patients), insert—
“19A Transfer of patients: out of area placements
(1) The Secretary of State must reduce to zero, within five years of the passage of the Mental Health Act 2025, the number of patients transferred to a hospital outside of the area in which the patient is ordinarily resident.
(2) The Secretary of State must publish, within six months of the passage of the Mental Health Act 2025, a report to outline how the duty under this section will be met, including how provision for treatment under this Act will be increased.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the transfer of patients to hospitals outside of their area to be reduced to zero within 5 years, and for the Secretary of State to produce a report on how this will be achieved.

Opposition Amendment NC17

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

To move the following Clause—
“Children detained on adult wards
(1) The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
(2) After section 131A (Accommodation, etc. for children), insert—
“131B Children detained on adult wards
(1) The Secretary of State must reduce to zero, within five years of the passage of the Mental Health Act 2025, the number of children detained on adult wards.
(2) The Secretary of State must publish, within six months of the passage of the Mental Health Act 2025, a report to outline how the duty under this section will be met, including how provision for treatment under this Act will be increased.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the number of children detained on adult wards to be reduced to zero within 5 years, and for the Secretary of State to produce a report on how this will be achieved.

Opposition Amendment NC18

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

To move the following Clause—
“Report on the impact of this Act on patients with eating disorders
(1) Within a period of 12 months following the day on which this Act is passed, the Secretary of State must publish a report on the impact of relevant provisions in this Act on patients with eating disorders.
(2) In subsection (1), “relevant provisions” include—
(a) section 5 (Grounds for detention),
(b) section 11 (Making treatment decisions),
(c) section 17 (Urgent treatment to alleviate serious suffering),
(d) section 21 (Care and treatment plans), and
(e) section 47 (After-care services).”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 3

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025
Wera Hobhouse (LD - Bath) - 06 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the Secretary of State to report on the impact of this Bill on patients with eating disorders within 12 months of the passage of this Bill.

Opposition Amendment NC19

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—
“Report and Guidance: Improving Outcomes for LGBT Patients
(1) The Secretary of State must, within 12 months of the day on which this Act is passed, prepare and lay before Parliament a report on the mental health outcomes of patients who are treated under the Mental Health Act 1983 and who identify as lesbian, gay, bisexual, or transgender (LGBT).
(2) The report under subsection (1) must include an assessment of—
(a) any differences between non-LGBT patients and LGBT patients in—
(i) the extent of the use of detention measures under the Mental Health Act 1983; and
(ii) treatment outcomes following detention, and
(b) the availability and accessibility of "culturally competent" mental health treatment under the 1983 Act for LGBT patients.
(3) Following publication of the report under subsection (1), the Secretary of State must publish guidance for responsible bodies and individuals working with patients under the Mental Health Act 1983, including but not limited to those working in—
(a) mental health hospitals;
(b) places of safety;
(c) crisis accommodation; and
(d) relevant community mental health services.
(4) The guidance under subsection (3) must include—
(a) provisions about updated training standards for staff regarding the specific mental health needs and experiences of LGBT individuals, including training on non-discriminatory practice and inclusive communication approaches;
(b) steps to improve safety for LGBT patients in relevant mental health settings, with particular regard to addressing discrimination and harassment; and
(c) a definition of “cultural competent mental health treatment” for the purposes of subsection (2).
(5) Responsible bodies and individuals working with patients under the Mental Health Act 1983 must have regard to guidance published under subsection (3).
(6) In preparing the report under subsection (1) and the guidance under subsection (3), the Secretary of State must consult—
(a) patients with a mental disorder who identify as LGBT;
(b) the families or carers of patients with a mental disorder who identify as LGBT;
(c) relevant professional bodies;
(d) integrated care boards;
(e) local authorities;
(f) providers of mental health treatment; and
(g) such other persons as the Secretary of State considers appropriate.
(7) The Secretary of State must update the guidance under subsection (3) at regular intervals, and no less frequently than every three years.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the Secretary of State to report on mental health outcomes and disparities for LGBT patients in treatment under the Mental Health Act 1983 and publish guidance covering training and safety for this specific group.

Opposition Amendment NC20

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

To move the following Clause—
“Report and Guidance: Transition to Adult Mental Health Treatment
(1) The Secretary of State must, within 18 months of passing of this Act, prepare and lay before Parliament a report on improving provision for patients transitioning from treatment in a hospital environment for children and young people to one for adults when they attain the age of 18.
(2) The report under subsection (1) must include an assessment of—
(a) the current pathways and outcomes for young people transitioning between hospital environments for children and for adults;
(b) any gaps in care or support experienced by patients during this transition;
(c) best practices for ensuring safe and effective transitions.
(3) Following the report under subsection (1), the Secretary of State must publish guidance for integrated care boards, local authorities, and providers of mental health treatment on improving outcomes and ensuring continuity of care for patients transitioning to a hospital environment for adults.
(4) The guidance under subsection (3) must include—
(a) specific steps to guarantee continuity of care for patients transitioning between treatment in a hospital environment for children and young people and one for adults;
(b) measures to identify young people requiring transition support at an appropriate stage;
(c) provisions for joint working and information sharing between providers of treatment for children and young people and for adults;
(d) requirements for the review and updating of care and treatment plans to reflect the needs of patients transitioning to a hospital environment for adults.
(5) Integrated care boards, local authorities, and providers of mental health treatment must have regard to guidance published under subsection (3).
(6) In preparing the report under subsection (1) and the guidance under subsection (3), the Secretary of State must consult—
(a) young people with experience of transitioning between children and young people’s and adult mental health services, and their carers and guardians;
(b) relevant professional bodies;
(c) integrated care boards;
(d) local authorities;
(e) providers of mental health treatment;
(f) such other persons as the Secretary of State considers appropriate.
(7) The Secretary of State must update the guidance under subsection (3) at regular intervals, and no less frequently than every three years.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the Secretary of State to review and report on the transition of patients from children's to adult mental health settings for treatment at age 18 and publish guidance for relevant bodies on improving provision and ensuring continuity of care during this transition.

Amendment NC21

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

To move the following Clause—
“Duty to provide advice and support to families and carers
(1) The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
(2) After section 117B, insert—
“117C After-care: provision of support and advice to families and carers
(1) The responsible integrated care board must ensure that, as part of the provision of after-care services under section 117 of this Act, advice and support is offered to the family or carers of the person discharged.
(2) This support must include—
(a) information about the person’s condition and recovery;
(b) guidance on how to support their recovery at home and avoid relapse;
(c) access to financial, housing, and social care advice services relevant to the situation of the person’s family; and
(d) procedures for family members or nominated persons to notify the integrated care board of concerns that the person is at future risk of detention under Part 2 of this Act.
(3) Where a concern is raised under subsection (2)(d), the integrated care board must—
(a) consider whether the individual meets criteria to be included on the register of persons at risk under section 125D of this Act; and
(b) take reasonable steps to involve the family or nominated person in planning of subsequent support, subject to—
(i) the person’s consent; or
(ii) if they lack capacity, the person’s best interests.
(4) The Secretary of State must publish guidance under section 125B of this Act on the format and provision of support under subsection (3)(b).””

Type: Backbencher

Signatures: 2

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025
Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the integrated care board, as part of the aftercare services offered under the Mental Health Act 1982, to offer support and advice to the family or carers of the person being discharged from treatment.

Amendment NC22

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

To move the following Clause—
“National strategy on mental health units
(1) The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
(2) In Part VIII (Miscellaneous Functions of Local Authorities and the Secretary of State), after section 118, insert—
“118A National strategy on mental health units
(1) The Secretary of State must, within 12 months of the passing of the Mental Health Act 2025, publish a national strategy to set out how the Government will ensure that all relevant mental health units meet or exceed “good” safety standards as assessed by the Care Quality Commission (CQC).
(2) A strategy issued under this section must address the following matters—
(a) recruitment, retention and training of mental health staff,
(b) patient-to-staff ratios, and
(c) safe staffing levels during crises and night shifts.
(3) Following publication of the strategy, a report on implementation progress must be laid before Parliament annually.
(4) For the purposes of this section, a “relevant mental health unit” is a facility used for treatment under this Act.””

Type: Backbencher

Signatures: 2

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025
Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the Secretary of State to publish a strategy, followed by an annual progress report, on how the Government will ensure that all mental health units used for treatment under the Mental Health Act 1983 are rated “good” or above by the CQC.

Amendment NC23

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

To move the following Clause—
“Impact assessment: children and young people in temporary foster care
(1) The Secretary of State must, within 18 months of the passing of this Act, publish and lay before Parliament an impact assessment on the impact of this Act on children and young people who are in temporary foster care.
(2) The impact assessment under this section must consider—
(a) whether the ordinary residence provisions result in delays or inequities in accessing treatment or after-care under this Act;
(b) the effect of transitions between placements on continuity of treatment under this Act; and
(c) any unintended consequences for children and young people in temporary foster care arising from the application of subsections (3) to (5) of section 125G of the Mental Health Act 1983.”

Type: Backbencher

Signatures: 2

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025
Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require the Government to publish an impact assessment on the impact of this Act on children and young people in temporary foster care.

Opposition Amendment NC24

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

To move the following Clause—
“Application in respect of patient already on hospital grounds
(1) The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
(2) In section 5(1) (Application in respect of a patient already in hospital), after “or,” insert “that the patient has attended a hospital or been brought to a hospital to seek help or admission as a patient or,””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Ben Spencer (Con - Runnymede and Weybridge) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Minister (Science, Innovation and Technology)

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would allow people who have attended or been brought to a hospital to seek help or admission as a patient to pursue an application for admission under the Mental Health Act.

Amendment NC25

Tabled: 11 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 11 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—
“Deaths in detention: independent investigations
(1) The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows.
(2) In Part X (Miscellaneous and Supplementary), after section 139, insert—
“139A Death in detention
(1) If an approved clinician in charge of the treatment of a patient is made aware that a patient has died while in detention under this Act, the approved clinician must, as soon as reasonably practicable, commission an independent investigation into the patient’s death.
(2) An investigation under this section—
(a) must be conducted by a legal or medical professional with no personal or professional connection to—
(i) the facilities in which the death occurred, or
(ii) a clinician supervising the patient’s care at the time of death;
(b) must be concluded within 12 months of the date of death; and
(c) must result in a report to be submitted to—
(i) the approved clinician,
(ii) the local authority,
(iii) the local integrated care board, and
(iv) the patient’s next of kin.
(3) The Secretary of State may by regulations make further provision under this section.””

Type: Backbencher

Signatures: 1

Natasha Irons (Lab - Croydon East) - 11 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This new clause would require an independent investigation to take place whenever a patient dies while in detention under the Mental Health Act 1983.

Government Amendment 37

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Clause 57, page 68, line 3, at end insert “subject to subsection (2).”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This is consequential on amendment 38.

Government Amendment 38

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Clause 57, page 68, line 4, leave out “This section, section 55” and insert “Section (Human Rights Act 1998: extension to certain private care providers), section 55, this section”

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This ensures that NC10 extends to England and Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland.

Opposition Amendment 21

Tabled: 03 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 3 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 58, page 68, line 15, at end insert—
“(5A) The Secretary of State must by regulations make provision for sections 3, 4 and 21 to come into force in full no later than two years after the day on which this Act is passed.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 3

Ian Sollom (LD - St Neots and Mid Cambridgeshire) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Universities and Skills)

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 03 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would establish an accelerated implementation timeline for provisions related to autism and learning disabilities, requiring them to be fully implemented within 2 years.

Government Amendment 39

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

NO DECISION has been made on this amendment

Clause 59, page 68, line 25, leave out subsection (2)

Type: Government

Signatures: 1

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This removes the privilege amendment inserted in the Lords.

Opposition Amendment 56

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN

Clause 3, page 3, line 19, at end insert—
“(4) The Secretary of State may by regulations update the definitions in subsection (2) in response to scientific advancements.
(5) A statutory instrument containing regulations under this section may not be made unless a draft of the instrument has been laid before and approved by a resolution of each House of Parliament.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Ben Spencer (Con - Runnymede and Weybridge) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Minister (Science, Innovation and Technology)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would allow the definitions for mental disorder, autism, learning disability and psychiatric disorder to be updated by secondary legislation as science evolves.

Opposition Amendment 1

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN

Clause 4, page 4, line 41, at end insert—
“(iv) housing.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that housing needs are considered as part of care, education and treatment review meetings.

Amendment 51

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 4, line 41, at end insert—
“(iv) accommodation and relocation, and”

Type: Backbencher

Signatures: 2

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025
Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that the impact of accommodation and relocation is considered in care and treatment reviews for patients with autism or learning disabilities.

Opposition Amendment 2

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 5, line 23, at end insert—
“(v) the patient,
(vi) the patient’s nominated person, and
(vii) the patient’s independent mental health advocate.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 3

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025
Jess Brown-Fuller (LD - Chichester) - 26 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Hospitals and Primary Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would ensure that nominated persons and independent mental health advocates receive copy of a care, education, and treatment review meeting report for children and young people with autism or a learning disability.

Opposition Amendment 3

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 5, line 31, for “12” substitute “six”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would shorten the length between care and treatment reviews from 12 months to six months.

Opposition Amendment 4

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 7, line 6, at end insert—
“(iii) housing, and”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that housing needs are considered as part of care and treatment review meetings.

Opposition Amendment 5

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 7, line 32, at end insert—
“(v) the patient,
(vi) the patient’s nominated person, and
(vii) the patient’s independent mental health advocate.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that nominated persons and independent mental health advocates receive a copy of a care and treatment review meeting report.

Opposition Amendment 6

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 7, line 40, for “12” substitute “six”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would shorten the length between care and treatment reviews from 12 months to six months.

Opposition Amendment 7

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 8, line 12, leave out “must have regard to” and insert “have a duty to carry out”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that integrated care boards and local authorities responsible for a patient's treatment and care have a duty to implement recommendations arising from a care and treatment review.

Opposition Amendment 8

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

Clause 4, page 8, line 27, at end insert—
“(ba) the person is under 18 years old and satisfies the conditions in (b)(ii).”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment inserts a new subsection that extends the duty on integrated care boards to establish and maintain a register for those at risk of detention to all children and young people under the age of 18.

Opposition Amendment 47

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 9, line 20, at end insert—
“(6) The risk factors specified in regulations under subsection (5) must include—
(a) homelessness;
(b) addiction;
(c) domestic abuse;
(d) miscarriage and traumatic birth;
(e) experience of armed conflict; and
(f) bereavement.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would specify risk factors for detention for people on the register of people at risk of detention under Clause 4.

Opposition Amendment 9

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 9, line 29, at end insert—
“(c) seek to ensure that the needs of children and young people can be met without detaining them under Part 2 of this Act.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 3

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025
Dawn Butler (Lab - Brent East) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment extends the duty on integrated care boards and local authorities to exercise their marketing functions in a way that seeks to ensure that children and young people’s needs can be met without detaining them.

Opposition Amendment 20

Tabled: 03 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 3 June 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

Clause 4, page 9, line 38, at end insert—
“125ZF Registers: duty to maintain crisis accommodation
(1) In exercising its functions under section 125E, an integrated care board must seek to ensure that there is appropriate crisis accommodation for people with autism or a learning disability within its area.
(2) For the purposes of this section, "appropriate crisis accommodation" means accommodation which—
(a) is designed to meet the specific needs of people with autism or learning disability during periods of acute mental health crisis;
(b) is staffed by persons with specialist training in supporting people with autism or a learning disability;
(c) maintains appropriate staffing ratios determined by guidance issued by the Secretary of State; and
(d) provides a safe alternative to detention under section 136 of this Act.
(3) The Secretary of State must issue guidance about the exercise of functions under this section, and integrated care boards must have regard to this guidance.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 3

Ian Sollom (LD - St Neots and Mid Cambridgeshire) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Universities and Skills)

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 03 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would require integrated care boards to establish and maintain appropriate crisis accommodation specifically designed for people with autism or learning disability as one of its duties in relation to registers of people at risk of detention.

Opposition Amendment 10

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 10, line 5, at end insert—
125FA Report: sufficient commissioning services for people with autism or learning disability
(1) Within four months of the day on which the Mental Health Act 2025 is passed, the Secretary of State must lay before Parliament a plan to allocate sufficient resources for commissioning services regarding the treatment and detention of autistic people and people with learning disabilities to ensure operability of provisions in this Act.
(2) The plan must include—
(a) revised assumptions of the number of autistic people and people with learning disabilities who may require detention under this Act;
(b) the actions that the Secretary of State will take to ensure community services are available to meet demand after the 28-day detention period;
(c) plans for data collection to support commissioning sufficient services;
(d) plans to allocate appropriate resource to ensure operability of services, including, but not limited to, financial resource;
(e) plans to ensure that responsible bodies and individuals receive the necessary training to carry out support, diagnostic, and treatment plans.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment requires the Secretary of State to present a plan within four months to ensure sufficient services, resources, data, and training are in place to support autistic people and those with learning disabilities under the Act.

Opposition Amendment 22

Tabled: 03 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 3 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 10, line 5, at end insert—
“125FA Assessment: provision of services for people with autism or learning disability
(1) Each financial year, an integrated care board must—
(a) conduct an assessment of the availability and adequacy of services within its area for people with autism or a learning disability who have specified risk factors for detention under Part 2 of this Act;
(b) publish the results of the assessment; and
(c) publish an action plan to address any gaps in provision identified.
(2) The assessment under subsection (1) must include consideration of—
(a) the availability of appropriate crisis accommodation;
(b) the availability of appropriate community support services;
(c) the adequacy of training for responsible bodies and individuals to carry out support, diagnostic and treatment plans; and
(d) the experiences of people with autism or a learning disability who have specified risk factors for detention under Part 2 of this Act and their families or carers.
(3) The integrated care board must consult the following in conducting the assessment—
(a) persons with autism or a learning disability who have specified risk factors for detention under Part 2 of this Act and their families or carers;
(b) the relevant local authority or authorities;
(c) providers of relevant services; and
(d) such other persons as the integrated care board considers appropriate.
(4) The Secretary of State must issue guidance about the conduct of assessments under this section, and integrated care boards must have regard to this guidance.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 3

Ian Sollom (LD - St Neots and Mid Cambridgeshire) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Universities and Skills)

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 03 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would require integrated care boards to conduct and publish annual assessments of the provision available for people with autism or learning disability at risk of detention and to prepare action plans to address any identified gaps.

Opposition Amendment 24

Tabled: 03 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 3 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 4, page 10, line 5, at end insert—
“125FA Report: services for people with autism or learning disability
(1) The Secretary of State must, within 12 months of this section coming into force and annually thereafter, prepare and lay before Parliament a report on—
(a) the availability of appropriate accommodation for people with autism or learning disability detained under this Act;
(b) the number of instances where appropriate accommodation could not be found within statutory timeframes;
(c) the progress towards implementation of sections 3 and 4 of the Mental Health Act 2025 and the impact of any delays to implementation on people with autism or a learning disability; and
(d) progress made towards meeting the needs of people with autism or a learning disability without detaining them under Part 2 of this Act.
(2) In preparing the report, the Secretary of State must consult—
(a) people with autism or a learning disability who have specified risk factors for detention under Part 2 of this Act and their families or carers;
(b) integrated care boards;
(c) local authorities; and
(d) such other persons as the Secretary of State considers appropriate.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 3

Ian Sollom (LD - St Neots and Mid Cambridgeshire) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Universities and Skills)

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 03 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would require the Secretary of State to report annually to Parliament on the availability of appropriate placements for people with autism or learning disabilities and on progress implementing the relevant provisions of the Act.

Opposition Amendment 25

Tabled: 03 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 3 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN

Clause 4, page 10, line 5, at end insert—
“125FA Training standards
(1) The Secretary of State must by regulations make provision about training standards for responsible bodies and individuals working with people with autism or a learning disability in—
(a) mental health hospitals;
(b) places of safety designated under sections 135 or 136 of this Act;
(c) crisis accommodation; and
(d) such other settings as the Secretary of State considers appropriate.
(2) Regulations under subsection (1) must—
(a) specify minimum training requirements;
(b) require training to be co-produced with people with autism or learning disability and their families or carers;
(c) require regular refresher training; and
(d) include training on de-escalation techniques and alternatives to restraint.
(3) The Secretary of State must publish guidance about the standards set out in regulations under subsection (1).
(4) A statutory instrument containing regulations under this section is subject to annulment in pursuance of a resolution of either House of Parliament.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 3

Ian Sollom (LD - St Neots and Mid Cambridgeshire) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Universities and Skills)

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 03 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would require the Secretary of State to produce guidance on minimum training standards for staff working with people with autism or learning disabilities in mental health settings and require that training be co-produced with people with lived experience and their families.

Opposition Amendment 52

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN

Clause 5, page 11, leave out lines 20 to 22 and insert—
“(b) in the case of a patient who lacks capacity or competence to consent to admission for assessment (or for assessment followed by medical treatment), serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of the patient or of another person unless the patient is so detained by a constable or other authorised person, or in the case of a patient who does not lack capacity or competence to consent to admission for assessment (or for assessment followed by medical treatment) serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of another person unless the patient is so detained by a constable or other authorised person; and”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Ben Spencer (Con - Runnymede and Weybridge) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Minister (Science, Innovation and Technology)
Government Amendment 26

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED ON DIVISION

Clause 5, page 11, line 22, leave out “by a constable or other authorised person”

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 04 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

One of the tests for detaining a person under the mental health legislation is that harm may be caused, or that treatment is not possible, without detention. This amendment and amendments 27, 28 and 29 remove wording stipulating that the detention that is necessary must be detention by a constable or other authorised person (as defined).

Opposition Amendment 53

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 5, page 11, leave out lines 27 to 29 and insert—
“(b) in the case of a patient who lacks capacity or competence to consent to admission for medical treatment, serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of the patient or of another person unless the patient receives medical treatment, or in the case of a patient who does not lack capacity or competence to consent to admission for medical treatment, serious harm may be caused to the health or safety of another person unless the patient receives medical treatment,”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Ben Spencer (Con - Runnymede and Weybridge) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Minister (Science, Innovation and Technology)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment, along with Amendment 52, would add to the grounds for admission to hospital for assessment or treatment that the patient must lack the capacity to consent to that admission, if they would not be detained due to being a risk to others.

Government Amendment 27

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED ON DIVISION

Clause 5, page 11, line 33, leave out “by a constable or other authorised person”

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 04 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

See explanatory statement for amendment 26.

Government Amendment 28

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED ON DIVISION

Clause 5, page 12, line 6, leave out “by a constable or other authorised person”

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 04 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

See explanatory statement for amendment 26.

Government Amendment 29

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED ON DIVISION

Clause 5, page 12, line 23, leave out subsection (7)

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 04 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

See explanatory statement for amendment 26.

Opposition Amendment 11

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN

Clause 6, page 13, line 6, at end insert—
“(c) after subsection (6) insert—
“(6A) Any person subject to a community treatment order must be informed orally and in writing at the time of the making of the order of their right to an independent mental health advocate under section 130A of this Act.””

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

The amendment would ensure that people who are to be subject to a community treatment order would receive information about their right to advocacy.

Government Amendment 30

Tabled: 04 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 4 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED ON DIVISION

Clause 6, page 13, line 7, leave out subsection (3)

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 04 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 04 Jun 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment removes provisions relating to the duration and review of community treatment orders.

Opposition Amendment 12

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN

Clause 8, page 15, line 11, after “treatment” insert “including the setting in which treatment takes place,”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 5

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025
Helen Morgan (LD - North Shropshire) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Health and Social Care)

Alison Bennett (LD - Mid Sussex) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Care and Carers)

Jess Brown-Fuller (LD - Chichester) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Hospitals and Primary Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that the definition of appropriate medical treatment includes the setting in which treatment takes place.

Opposition Amendment 44

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NEGATIVED ON DIVISION

Clause 8, page 15, line 17, at end insert—
“(iii) seeks to minimise the patient’s distress and promote psychological wellbeing and recovery from any childhood trauma;”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Luke Evans (Con - Hinckley and Bosworth) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Parliamentary Under Secretary (Health and Social Care)
Opposition Amendment 45

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 8, page 15, line 22, after “manifestations” insert “and seeks to minimise the patient’s distress and promote their psychological wellbeing and recovery from any childhood trauma.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 1

Luke Evans (Con - Hinckley and Bosworth) - 06 Jun 2025
Shadow Parliamentary Under Secretary (Health and Social Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment, along with Amendment 44, seeks to promote a therapeutic environment and culture which recognises a patient’s trauma.

Opposition Amendment 13

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 18, page 27, line 22, at end insert—
“(1A) Regulations under subsection (1) may only be made to provide for circumstances where—
(a) the treatment is immediately necessary to save the patient’s life,
(b) obtaining a second opinion would cause a delay that places the patient at a significant and imminent risk of death or serious physical harm, and
(c) the treatment is reversible.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 5

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025
Helen Morgan (LD - North Shropshire) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Health and Social Care)

Alison Bennett (LD - Mid Sussex) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Care and Carers)

Jess Brown-Fuller (LD - Chichester) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Hospitals and Primary Care)

Member's explanatory statement

The amendment limits the power to dispense with a second medical opinion for urgent electro-convulsive therapy to exceptional, life-threatening cases, introduces periodic reviews of its use, and ensures transparency by prohibiting retrospective application.

Opposition Amendment 48

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN

Clause 21, page 30, line 28, at end insert—
(ab)containing steps to alleviate social and financial stressors contributing to the patient’s risk of requiring detention in future; and”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 5

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025
Helen Morgan (LD - North Shropshire) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Health and Social Care)

Alison Bennett (LD - Mid Sussex) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Care and Carers)

Jess Brown-Fuller (LD - Chichester) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Hospitals and Primary Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would require social and financial stressors be addressed in care and treatment plans.

Opposition Amendment 14

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 21, page 30, line 39, at end insert—
“(iii) the discussion of the person’s finances and financial situation.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 5

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025
Jess Brown-Fuller (LD - Chichester) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Hospitals and Primary Care)

Helen Morgan (LD - North Shropshire) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Health and Social Care)

Alison Bennett (LD - Mid Sussex) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Care and Carers)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that the care and treatment plan includes matters relating to the patient’s financial circumstances.

Opposition Amendment 15

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 21, page 30, line 41, at end insert—
“(4A) The information authorised or required to be included in, or attached to, a care and treatment plan by virtue of regulations under subsection (3) must include provision to protect the patient's housing and accommodation during and immediately after they are subject to a care and treatment plan.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 5

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025
Helen Morgan (LD - North Shropshire) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Health and Social Care)

Alison Bennett (LD - Mid Sussex) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Care and Carers)

Jess Brown-Fuller (LD - Chichester) - 15 Jul 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Hospitals and Primary Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that protection of housing and accommodation are considered as part of care and treatment plans.

Opposition Amendment 23

Tabled: 03 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 3 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 21, page 30, line 41, at end insert—
“(4A) Where a patient has autism or a learning disability, the care and treatment plan must—
(a) identify specific crisis prevention strategies appropriate to the patient's individual needs;
(b) identify suitable crisis accommodation options in the event that the patient's current placement becomes unable to meet their needs;
(c) specify how the patient's sensory needs will be met;
(d) specify communication approaches appropriate to the patient's needs; and
(e) record the views of the patient's family members or carers, where appropriate and with the patient's consent.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 6

Ian Sollom (LD - St Neots and Mid Cambridgeshire) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Universities and Skills)

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 03 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 03 Jun 2025
Helen Morgan (LD - North Shropshire) - 17 Sep 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Health and Social Care)

Alison Bennett (LD - Mid Sussex) - 17 Sep 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Care and Carers)

Jess Brown-Fuller (LD - Chichester) - 17 Sep 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Hospitals and Primary Care)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would ensure that care and treatment plans for patients with autism or learning disabilities include specific components addressing their particular needs, including crisis prevention strategies and identification of suitable crisis accommodation options.

Amendment 50

Tabled: 06 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 6 June 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 21, page 30, line 41, at end insert—
“(4A) For the purposes of preparing a plan under this section, a discharge planning meeting must be held.
(4B) A meeting under subsection (4A) must include—
(a) the patient;
(b) the patient’s nominated person;
(c) any independent mental health advocate acting for the patient;
(d) a representative of the integrated care board;
(e) a local housing officer;
(f) a local authority social worker;
(g) a representative from the Department for Work and Pensions; and
(h) any other person or agency involved in the patient’s care or likely to support recovery in the community.
(4C) A care and treatment plan under this section must include—
(a) actions agreed by relevant agencies to support the patient’s recovery;
(b) provisions to address clinical, financial, housing, and social needs;
(c) steps to reduce the likelihood of readmission or further detention under this Act; and
(d) a record of any points of disagreement and how they are to be resolved.
(4D) Where an agency listed under subsection (4B) fails to attend a discharge planning meeting, the responsible clinician must take reasonable steps to obtain their input in writing and record it in the plan.
(4E) For the purposes of subsection (4A) to (4D), the Secretary of State must issue guidance on best practice for discharge planning meetings and multi-agency collaboration.””

Type: Backbencher

Signatures: 2

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 06 Jun 2025
Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 06 Jun 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment would require the clinician preparing a care and treatment plan to hold a multi-agency planning meeting to inform it, and specifies what must be included within the plan.

Opposition Amendment 16

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 21, page 31, line 26, at end insert—
“(g) following the patient turning 18 years of age during the course of a care and treatment plan.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 2

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment ensures that individuals turning 18 during a care and treatment plan have their plans reviewed to maintain continuity of care while transitioning from child to adult services.

Opposition Amendment 17

Tabled: 30 May 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 30 May 2025

This amendment was NOT CALLED

Clause 21, page 31, line 29, leave out from “so” and insert—
“(a) consult the persons mentioned in subsection (5)(f),
(b) ask whether there are children in the family and take actions to respond if the children need help or protection from harm.”

Type: Opposition

Signatures: 4

Danny Chambers (LD - Winchester) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Mental Health)

Zöe Franklin (LD - Guildford) - 30 May 2025
Alison Bennett (LD - Mid Sussex) - 30 May 2025
Liberal Democrat Spokesperson (Care and Carers)

Ed Davey (LD - Kingston and Surbiton) - 30 May 2025

Member's explanatory statement

This amendment seeks to deliver earlier identification of children who might be in need of information, support, or protection from potential harm.

Government Amendment Gov 26

Tabled: 12 Jun 2025
Public Bill Committee Amendments as at 12 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED TO

Clause 5, page 11, line 22, leave out "by a constable or other authorised person"

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 12 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 12 Jun 2025
Government Amendment Gov 27

Tabled: 12 Jun 2025
Public Bill Committee Amendments as at 12 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED TO

Clause 5, page 11, line 33, leave out "by a constable or other authorised person”

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 12 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 12 Jun 2025
Government Amendment Gov 28

Tabled: 12 Jun 2025
Public Bill Committee Amendments as at 12 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED TO

Clause 5, page 12, line 6, leave out "by a constable or other authorised person"

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 12 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 12 Jun 2025
Government Amendment Gov 29

Tabled: 12 Jun 2025
Public Bill Committee Amendments as at 12 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED TO

Clause 5, page 12, line 23, leave out subsection (7)

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 12 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 12 Jun 2025
Government Amendment Gov 30

Tabled: 12 Jun 2025
Public Bill Committee Amendments as at 12 June 2025

This amendment was AGREED TO

Clause 6, page 13, line 7, leave out subsection (3)

Type: Government

Signatures: 2

Stephen Kinnock (Lab - Aberafan Maesteg) - 12 Jun 2025
Minister of State (Department of Health and Social Care)

Sojan Joseph (Lab - Ashford) - 12 Jun 2025
Amendment NC26

Tabled: 20 Jun 2025
Notices of Amendments as at 20 June 2025

This amendment was WITHDRAWN AFTER DEBATE

To move the following Clause—"Use of restraint and restrictive intervention (1) The Mental Health Act 1983 is amended as follows. (2) In Part II (Compulsory Admission to Hospital and Guardianship), after section 7, insert—"7A Use of force in connection with admission for assessment or treatment (1) A relevant organisation that operates a hospital must appoint a responsible person for the purposes of this section. (2) The responsible person must— (a) be employed by the relevant health organisation, and (b) be of an appropriate level of seniority. (3) The responsible person must keep a record of any use of force by staff who work in that hospital against a person (“P”) who— (a) has been admitted for assessment or treatment under sections 2 to 5 of this Act; or (b) is on the hospital premises and is at risk of detention under this Act. (4) The Secretary of State must by regulations provide for the risk factors to be considered under subsection (3)(b). (5) A record kept under this section must include— (a) the reason for the use of force (b) the place, date and duration of the use of force (c) whether the type or types of force used on the patient formed part of the patient's care plan; (d) the name of the patient on whom force was used; (e) a description of how force was used; (f) the patient's consistent identifier; (g) the name and job title of any member of staff who used force on the patient; (h) the reason any person who was not a member of staff in the hospital was involved in the use of force on the patient; (i) the patient's mental disorder (if known); (j) the relevant characteristics of the patient (if known); (k) whether the patient has a learning disability or autistic spectrum disorders; (l) a description of the outcome of the use of force; (m) whether the patient died or suffered any serious injury as a result of the use of force; (n) any efforts made to avoid the need to use force on the patient; and (o) whether a notification regarding the use of force was sent to the person or persons (if any) to be notified under the patient's care plan. (6) The responsible person must keep the record for three years from the date on which it was made. (7) The Secretary of State must ensure that, at the end of each year, statistics are published regarding the use of force by staff who work in hospitals under the conditions set out in this section.””

Type: Backbencher

Signatures: 7

Olivia Blake (Lab - Sheffield Hallam) - 20 Jun 2025
Kim Johnson (Lab - Liverpool Riverside) - 20 Jun 2025
Neil Duncan-Jordan (Ind - Poole) - 20 Jun 2025
Carla Denyer (Green - Bristol Central) - 20 Jun 2025
Green Spokesperson (Immigration)

Ellie Chowns (Green - North Herefordshire) - 20 Jun 2025
Green Spokesperson (Foreign Affairs)

Siân Berry (Green - Brighton Pavilion) - 20 Jun 2025
Green Spokesperson (Crime and Policing)

Adrian Ramsay (Green - Waveney Valley) - 20 Jun 2025
Green Spokesperson (Treasury)